GP160F/160DF/160
SERVICE
MANUAL
REVISION 0
FEB. 1999
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
FY8-13G2-000
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF
REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY
FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED
MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED
TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should
be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
INTRODUCTION
This service manual provides basic information required for performing field service
to maintain the product quality and functions of the this machine. The structure of the
manual is as described below.
Material Name
Main unit service manual
G3 FAX manual
ADF
Content
The main unit and cassette feeder’s; functions, mechanism,
disassembly, assembly, adjustment methods, etc.
The main unit’s G3 facsimile functions.
The functions, mechanism, disassembly, assembly, adjustment method, etc. of the main unit’s ADF.
Each chapter consists of the following sections.
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” : Features, specifications, operation methods, copying
process.
Chapter 2, “Basic operation,” : Explanation of the machine’s basic operations
Chapter 3, “Exposure system,” : Explanation of the exposure system’s mechanical /
electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment
methods.
Chapter 4, “Image processing system,” : Explanation of the CCD, analogue / digital
image processing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment methods.
Chapter 5, “Laser exposure system,” : Explanation of the laser exposure system’s
mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and
adjustment methods.
Chapter 6, “Image formation system,” : Explanation of the image formation system’s
mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and
adjustment methods.
Chapter 7, “Pick-up / Feed system,” : Explanation of the pick-up / feed system’s
mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and
adjustment methods.
Chapter 8, “Fixing system,” : Explanation of the fixing system’s mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment methods.
Chapter 9, “Outer cover / auxiliary control system,” : Explanation of the outer cover /
auxiliary control system’s mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing,
disassembly, assembly and adjustment methods.
Chapter 10, “Cassette feeder,” : Explanation of the cassette feeder’s mechanical /
electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment
methods.
Chapter 11, “Installation,” : Conditions relating to the place of installation, and the
installation procedures.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
i
Chapter 12, “Maintenance and Inspection,” : Table of periodic replacement parts and
consumables replacement targets, periodic service list and parts to be cleaned during a
customer service call.
Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting,” : Standards / adjustments, operation failure countermeasures and delivery failure countermeasures
Appendix : General timing chart, general circuit diagram, etc..
The explanations in this manual are based on the following principles.
1. Each chapter gives an overview of each function’s purpose, role and the connection
between the electrical and mechanical systems as well as the operation timing of
each part.
In the outline diagram, the
signal shows the mechanical drive transmission.
When the
signal is shown with a signal name, it indicates the electric signal
flow.
In the explanation of this units digital circuit, “1” is indicated when the signal’s voltage level is high, and “0” is indicated when it is low. However, the voltage value will
differ depending on the electrical circuit. Furthermore, the * in the signal value
[DRMD*] shows the DRMD signal is “0” and ON.
In each chapter, [Power supply ON] indicates the power supply SW has been turned
“ON”, the front door, etc., has been shut, and power is being supplied to the copier.
2. This unit utilizes micro processors, however, due to the impossibility of checking the
micro processor’s internal operation, an explanation of the micro processor’s operation has been omitted. Furthermore, assuming that internal repair of the print circuit
board will not take place on the customer’s premises, the explanation of the circuit in
the print circuit board’s circuit is limited to an outline explanation using a block diagram. Consequently, the electrical circuit explanations consist of 2 types, from the
sensors to the main circuit board’s input section, and from the main circuit board’s
output section to the load, and block diagrams by function.
Changes of the contents made for the sake of product improvements will be notified
in Service Information (Technical Information).
Gaining a sound and thorough understanding of the copier through careful reading
of this service manual and the subsequently issued Service Information (Technical
Information) bulletins is the only way to develop the technical skill necessary to prolong
product quality and functionality and the practical ability to be able to determine the
cause of breakdowns.
ii
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
iii
8MB expanded memory
Super G3 FAX board
Modular
Modem board NCU board board
Cassette unit E1
Cassette Unit D1
ADF-H1
Installation options
System
configuration
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Standard equipment
Option
Standard equipment
Digital black and white copier (with ADF)
Option
Standard equipment
Digital black and white copier and facsimile
GP160F
Main unit configuration
GP160DF
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Digital black and white copier
(Copy board cover model)
GP160
iv
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
I.
II.
III.
IV.
FEATURES ..............................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2
NAMES OF PARTS .................................1-6
A. External view......................................1-6
B. Cross sectional diagram ....................1-8
OPERATION EXPLANATION................1-10
A. Control panel....................................1-10
B. Basic operation ................................1-13
C. Advanced features ...........................1-13
D. User mode .......................................1-14
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE
CARRIED OUT BY THE USER .............1-32
VI. SAFETY .................................................1-33
A.
Laser beam safety.......................1-33
B. Toner safety .....................................1-36
VII. COPYING PROCESS ............................1-37
A. Outline..............................................1-37
V.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
I.
II.
BASIC OPERATION ................................2-1
A. Function configuration........................2-1
B. Copy operation overview ...................2-2
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW .......2-3
III.
IV.
V.
BASIC SEQUENCES...............................2-4
MAIN MOTOR..........................................2-5
PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB
INPUT/OUTPUT.......................................2-6
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
II.
OPERATION OVERVIEW........................3-1
A. Overview ............................................3-1
B. Exposure system sequence ...............3-2
SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM....................3-3
A. Document scanner motor...................3-3
III.
B. Charging the magnification ratio ........3-4
C. Scanning lamp control .......................3-4
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................3-5
A. Scanning lamp ...................................3-6
B. Document scanning motor .................3-8
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................4-1
ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING.............4-2
A. Overview ............................................4-2
B. CCD/CCD drive circuit .......................4-2
C. A-D conversion circuit /
ABC circuit .........................................4-3
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING..............4-4
A. Overview ............................................4-4
B. Shading correction .............................4-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
IV.
C. Magnification ratio process ................4-7
D. Edge emphasis / smoothing
process ..............................................4-7
E. Logarithmic correction........................4-8
F. Half tone density processing ..............4-9
G. Binarisation ........................................4-9
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................4-10
A. CCD unit ..........................................4-11
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
v
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................5-1
BD SIGNAL GENERATION .....................5-3
A. Overview ............................................5-3
B. BD generation / detection ..................5-3
LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT .......................5-4
A. Operation ...........................................5-4
IV.
V.
B. Laser light intensity control ................5-4
LASER SCANNER MOTOR
CONTROL................................................5-6
A. Operation outline................................5-6
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................5-7
A. Laser scanner unit .............................5-8
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................6-1
A. Construction .......................................6-1
PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS
CONTROL................................................6-3
A. Outline ...............................................6-3
B. Control operation ...............................6-3
TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS
CONTROL................................................6-4
A. Overview ............................................6-4
B. Bias control ........................................6-5
IV.
SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE
ELIMINATOR BIAS CONTROL ...............6-6
A. Operation ...........................................6-6
V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL ..............6-7
A. Outline ...............................................6-7
B. Operation ...........................................6-7
VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL................6-8
A. Operation ...........................................6-8
VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION ......................6-9
A. Operation ...........................................6-9
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
IV.
OVERVIEW..............................................7-1
A. Construction Overveiw .......................7-1
PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION ...........7-2
A. Overveiw ............................................7-2
CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM........7-3
A. Pick-up oparation ...............................7-3
B. Retry pick-up ......................................7-5
C. Paper size detection ..........................7-6
MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP .......................7-7
A. Overview ............................................7-7
B. Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism ........7-8
C. Multi-feeder retry pick-up ...................7-9
D. Multi-feeder paper size setting .........7-10
V.
PAPER FEEDING OPERATION............7-12
A. Paper leading edge detection ..........7-12
B. Paper width detection ......................7-12
VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................7-13
A. Overview ..........................................7-13
B. Types of Jam ...................................7-14
C. Jam sequence..................................7-14
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................7-23
A. Cassette feeding assembly ..............7-24
B. Multi-feeder assembly ......................7-30
C. Registration roller assembly.............7-33
D. Feeder assembly .............................7-35
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
I.
II.
vi
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ...................8-1
A. Overview ............................................8-1
B. Fixing pressure roller cleaning ...........8-1
FIXING CONTROL...................................8-3
A. Fixing temperature control .................8-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
III.
B. Fixing heater safety mechanism ........8-5
C. Fixing assembly malfunction
detector ..............................................8-5
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................8-6
A. Removing the fixing assembly ...........8-7
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL / AUXILIARY MECHANISM
I.
II.
III.
IV.
CONTROL PANEL...................................9-1
A. Overview ............................................9-1
POWER SUPPLY ....................................9-2
A. Low-voltage power supply circuit .......9-2
B. High voltage power supply circuit ......9-4
C. Energy save function control..............9-5
FAN ..........................................................9-7
A. Rotation control mechanism ..............9-7
BACK-UP BATTERY................................9-8
V.
A. Back-up function ................................9-8
B. Back-up Data ...................................9-12
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................9-16
A. Control panel....................................9-17
B. Main Motor .......................................9-19
C. DC controller PCB............................9-25
D. Image processor PCB ......................9-26
E. DC power supply PCB .....................9-27
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
OVERVIEW............................................10-1
OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITS ..............................................10-3
A. Overview ..........................................10-3
FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB
INPUT AND OUTPUT .............................10-4
OPERATION OVERVIEW......................10-5
A. Overview ..........................................10-5
B. Basic Sequence ..............................10-6
FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL................10-7
A. Operation .........................................10-7
VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................10-8
A. Overview ..........................................10-8
B. Jam Sensing ....................................10-9
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..............10-11
A. Removing the feeder motor ...........10-12
B. Removing the pick-up/feeder/
separation motor ............................10-12
C. Removing the pick-up unit .............10-14
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
I.
II.
CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION
LOCATION.............................................11-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION.......11-3
A. Opening the package and removing
the packing materials .......................11-4
B. Installing the cartridge ......................11-5
C. Loading paper into the cassette .......11-8
D. Loading paper into the
multi-feeder ....................................11-11
E. Attaching the tray/Power cord ........11-12
F. Checking the Copy image ..............11-13
G. Setting the Fax machine function ....11-13
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
I.
II.
III.
IV.
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS.....12-1
ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE
PARTS ...................................................12-1
BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES .....12-2
CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND
HANDLING.............................................12-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Storage when the packing seal is
intact ................................................12-3
B. Storage and handling when the
packing seal has been opened ........12-4
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
vii
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
I.
II.
III.
IV.
STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS.....13-2
A. Machanical system ..........................13-2
B. Electrical System .............................13-9
IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-15
A. Initial check ....................................13-15
B. Treatment procedures by faulty
image type .....................................13-17
C. Operation malfunction
countermeasures ...........................13-26
FAULTY FEEDING
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-34
A. Overview ........................................13-34
B. Copy paper jam..............................13-35
C. Faulty feeding ................................13-38
ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/
FUNCTIONS ........................................13-39
A. Clutches, solenoids ........................13-40
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Motor, fan .......................................13-42
Sensors ..........................................13-44
Switches, lamps, miscellaneous ....13-46
PCBs ..............................................13-48
Variable resistor(VR)/LED/check
pin listed by PCB plate ...................13-50
V. SERVICE MODE..................................13-55
A. Overview ........................................13-55
B. Operating Procedures ....................13-56
C. Service mode menu list..................13-57
D. SSSW Default Setting ....................13-63
E. Parameter settings .........................13-78
F. Test Mode (TEST MODE)............13-111
VI. REPORTS..........................................13-142
A. User reports .................................13-142
B. Service report...............................13-145
VII. USER ERRORS.................................13-163
VIII. SERVICE ERRORS ...........................13-170
APPENDIX
A.
B.
C.
viii
GENERAL TIMING CHART.....................A-1
SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS...........A-3
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
D.
E.
LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS....................A-11
SOLVENTS AND OILS..........................A-12
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an overview of the unit’s specifications, operating method and
copying process.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
FEATURES ..............................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2
NAMES OF PARTS .................................1-6
A. External view......................................1-6
B. Cross sectional diagram ....................1-8
OPERATION EXPLANATION................1-10
A. Control panel....................................1-10
B. Basic operation ................................1-13
C. Advanced features ...........................1-13
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
D. User mode .......................................1-14
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE
CARRIED OUT BY THE USER .............1-32
VI. SAFETY .................................................1-33
A.
Laser beam safety.......................1-33
B. Toner safety .....................................1-36
VII. COPYING PROCESS ............................1-37
A. Outline..............................................1-37
V.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
I. FEATURES
< Copy function >
• 1200 equivalent × 600dpi high resolution copy
• Due to a new engine, high image quality printing with minute particle super fine
toner (diameter 5 microns) has been made possible.
• Due to the integrated drum, toner cassette, the print inner assembly is refreshed
when the cartridge is replace.
• 256 gradation readings, and realistic half tone rendering.
• Max. 5 way / max. 1100 sheets large volume multi-level pick-up.
• Dual operation - allows copying during fax transmission.
< Fax function >
• High speed Super G3 Fax 2 second transmission (33.6kbps) provided as standard
for ordinary telephone lines.
• Able to send and receive A3 size direct copy.
• 400dpi scanning resolution ultra high image quality (ultra fine mode).
• 600dpi recording resolution ultra high image quality, standard mode 600dpi printing.
• Standard 1megabyte memory (roughly 64 sheets), possibility to expand to maximum 9 megabytes (roughly 576 sheets).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
II. SPECIFICATIONS
1.
Type
Item
Specifications
Main unit
Copyboard
Light source
Lens
Photosensitive medium
2.
Method
Item
Copying
Charging
Exposure
Copy density adjustment
Developing
Pick-up
Automatic
Manual
Transfer
Separation
Cleaning
Fixing
1-2
Desk top
Fixed
Xenon lamp
Fixed focal lens
OPC (φ 30)
Specifications
Indirect electrostatic copying method
AC roller charging method
Semiconductor laser
Automatic or manual
Dry single component jumping method (single unit drum cartridge)
Cassette
Multi-feeder
Roller charging method
Electrostatic separation (static charge elimination) + curvature
separation
Rubber blade
SURF Fixing
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
3.
Functions
Item
Types of document
Max. document size
Wait time
First copy time
Continuous copying
Pick-up capacity
Delivery tray capacity
Copy size
Cassette
pick-up
Multi-feeder
pick-up
Types of
Cassette
copy paper
pick-up
Multi-feeder
pick-up
Cassette specifications
Non image
Leading
width
edge
Trailing
edge
Front
Rear
Auto clear
Energy saver
Option *4
Specifications
Sheet, book, three dimensional objects (up to max. 2kg)
A3 / 11 × 17
15 seconds or less from power ON (20°C)
7 seconds or less from the energy saver mode being cancelled
12 seconds or less (main unit cassette pick-up, 1-to-1 copy, A4,
no AE)
1 to 99 sheets
Each cassette 250 sheets *1, multi-feeder 100 sheets (80g/m2)
100 sheets *2
Max. : A3 / 11 × 17
Min. : A5
Max. : A3
Min. : A5
Plain paper 64 to 90g/m2, recycled paper 64 to 90g/m2, tracing
paper (GNT-80) *1
Plain paper 64 to 128g/m2, tracing paper (SM-1) labels, recycled
paper 64 to 128g/m2, OHP *2, tracing paper (GNT-80)*3
With tab, universal
4.0 ± 2.0mm
2.5 ± 2.0mm
2.5 ± 2.0mm
2.5 ± 2.0mm
Yes (Standard 2 min., possible to change in units of 1 min.
between 0 to 9 min)
Yes (Standard 3 min., possible to change in units of 1 min.
between 3 to 30 min)
Cassette feeder (1 step type / 3 step type), 8MB expanded
memory, ADF, FAX board
*1: 50 or less sheets of tracing paper (GNT-80) by cassette.
*2: 50 or less sheets of OHP sheets by cassette (designated paper).
*3: 1 or less sheets of tracing paper (GNT-80) by multi-feeder.
*4: Differs depending on the main unit configuration.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-3
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
4.
Other
Item
Operating
Temperature range
environment Humidity range
Atmospheric pressure
range
Power
Main unit
supply
GP160
• 230V(ITA):
PNSxxxxx
• 230V(UK):
QCTxxxxx
• 230V(FRN): SBTxxxxx
• 230V(GER): TBTxxxxx
• 230V(AMS): UEHxxxxx
• 230V(CA):
RCXxxxxx
• 230V(Others):PHXxxxxx
GP160F
• 230V(ITA):
PHTxxxxx
• 230V(UK):
QCMxxxxx
• 230V(FRN): SBSxxxxx
• 230V(GER): TBRxxxxx
• 230V(AMS): UEGxxxxx
• 230V(CA):
RCWxxxxx
• 230V(Others):PHMxxxxx
Cassette Feeding Module-D1
Cassette Feeding Module-E1
Power
Maximum
consumption Standby
Energy saving mode
Operating
When in operation
noise
Standby
Dimensions Width
Depth
Height
Mass
Storage of
Copy paper
consumable
items
Cartridge
1-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Specifications
5 to 35°C
10 to 90% RH
709 to 1013hpa
GP160DF
• 230V(ITA):
• 230V(UK):
• 230V(FRN):
• 230V(GER):
• 230V(AMS):
PHLxxxxx
QCLxxxxx
SBRxxxxx
TBQxxxxx
UEFxxxxx
Supplied by main unit : ZCRxxxxx
Supplied by main unit : ZHRxxxxx
Approx. 800W
Approx. 20W
Approx. 14W
66dB or less
40dB or less
616 (mm) / 24.25”
640 (mm) / 25.20”
427 (mm) / 16.81” (Including ADF)
48.8kg 107.59 Ò
Store with the package closed and avoid
humidity
Refer to page 12-3
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
5.
Copy speed
Reproduction mode
Direct copy
Size
A4 (210 × 297mm)
A3 (297 × 420mm)
B4 (257 × 364mm)
A4R (297 × 210mm)
B5 (182 × 257mm)
B5R (257 × 182mm)
A4 (148.5 × 210mm)
LTR (216 × 279mm)
LTRR (279 × 216mm)
LGL (216 × 356mm)
11 × 17 (279 × 432mm)
Copy paper size
A4
A3
B4
A4R
B5
B5R
A5
LTR
LTRR
LGL
11 × 17
No. of copies / minute
16
9
10
9
16
12
12
16
9
9
9
Specifications are subject to change for the sake of product improvements.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-5
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A.
External view
Main unit
ADF standard equipment model
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[7]
[8]
Figure 1-301
[9]
[6]
Figure 1-302
Copyboard cover model
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[7]
[8]
Figure 1-303
[9]
[6]
Figure 1-304
Cassette feeder (accessory)
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 1-305
1-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Main unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Control panel
ADF
Document delivery tray
Delivery tray
Cassette
[6] Right lower cover
[7] Front cover
[8] Printer unit release handle
[9] Printer unit
[10] Multi feeder tray
Cassette feeder (accessory)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Cassette feeder
Cassette
Right door
Feeder lifting handle
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-7
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
B.
[1]
Cross sectional diagram
[3] [5]
[13]
[7] [9] [11]
[2] [4]
[6]
[12]
[8] [10]
[37]
[38]
[36]
[35]
[19] [21]
[15] [17]
[18]
[16]
[20]
[14]
[33] [31]
[34]
[32] [30]
[22]
[29] [27] [25] [23]
[28] [26] [24]
Figure 1-306
1-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
[1] Mirror 3
[2] Mirror 2
[3] White reference assembly
[4] Mirror 1
[5] Document scanning lamp
[6] Copyboard glass
[7] Fixing delivery roller
[8] Cleaning roller
[9] Fixing film
[10] CCD
[11] Lens
[12] Charge eliminator
[13] Laser scanner unit
[14] Photosensitive drum
[15] Primary charging roller
[16] Mirror 4
[17] Developing cylinder
[18] Cartridge
[19] Registration pressure roller
[20] Registration roller
[21] Multi-feeder pick-up roller
[22] Multi-feeder tray
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
[23] Vertical path roller (Main unit pick-up
assembly)
[24] Vertical path roller (Cassette feeder)
[25] Separation roller (Main unit pick-up
assembly)
[26] Separation roller (Cassette feeder)
[27] Feed roller (Cassette feeder)
[28] Feed roller (Main unit pick-up
assembly)
[29] Pick-up roller (Cassette feeder)
[30] Pick-up roller (Main unit pick-up
assembly)
[31] Transfer charging roller
[32] Separation static charge elimination
[33] Paper sensor lever (Cassette feeder)
[34] Paper sensor lever (Main unit pickup assembly)
[35] Feed assembly
[36] Fixed pressure roller
[37] Paper cassette (Main unit)
[38] Paper cassette (Cassette feeder)
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-9
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
IV. OPERATION EXPLANATION
A.
Control panel
[4]
[15]
[12]
[6] [10][11] [13] [14] [16] [17]
[5]
In Use/Memory
Error
Fax Monitor
Program
Coded
Dial
Hook
Redial
Stamp
Direct
TX
Energy Saver
Reset
[1]
[2]
[3]
R
Data Registration
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear
Stop
Tone
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
[24]
Start
Copy Special Features
Return
1
OPER SYMBOLS
Set
57 ~ 84
29 ~ 56
[18]
[7] [8] [9]
[19]
[20] [21] [23]
[22]
[25]
Figure 1-401
1-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Key name
Display contrast VR
Collate key
Copy special features
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
COPY
FAX*
PRINT/SCAN*
Display selection
Return
Set
Fax Monitor*
[11] Program*
[12] Coded Dial*
[13] Hook*
[14] R*
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
Redial*
Stamp*
Direct TX*
Reset
Data registration
Numeric key
Clear
Start
Stop
Energy saver
One touch panel*
Function outline
Adjusts the control panel contrast.
Performs sort copying when copying with the ADF.
Performs frame erasing, margin, transferring and 2 in 1
copying.
Changes over to the copy mode.
Changes over to the fax mode.
Changes over to the printer mode.
Selects functions shown in the display.
Returns to the previous display.
Confirms the registration/setting.
Confirms the transmission conditions, clears transmission
reservations.
Registers a single operation that can be selected by simply
pushing this key.
Uses speed dial.
Ability to listen to the other party’s response through the
speaker.
Press to dial an outside telephone number, or an extension
number, when the fax is connected through a swichboard
(PBX).
Redials the last number dialed.
Stamps a completed transmission.
Executes direct transmission.
Resets the copy mode.
Calls up the user mode setting display.
Dials the telephone number, sets the number of copies, etc..
Clears the registration/setting.
Starts transmission / copying.
Stops transmission / copying.
Clears the energy saver mode.
One touch dial key.
*: Not available on copiers not equipped with the fax function
**: Not available on copiers not equipped with the printer function
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-11
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Spealer volume switch
Slide seitch (Normally off for user speration)
Delayed Transmission
Polling
Confidential
Mailbox
Memory Box
Memory
Reception
Transfer
Memory
Reference
Report
TTI Selector
Subaddress
Relay
Broadcast
Pause
Delate
Space
Clear
Password
Receive
Mode
Tone/+
Set
D.T.
Figure 1-402
Key name
Delayed Transmission*
Polling*
Confidential Mailbox*
Relay Broadcast*
Delete*
Pause
Memory Box*
Memory Reception*
Transfer*
Memory Reference*
Report*
Clear
Set
TTI Selector*
Subaddress*
Password*
Receive mode*
Tone/+
DT
Space*
Shift key
Function outline
Designates the sending time of the transmission.
Designates polling transmission.
Designates confidential transmission.
Designates relay origination transmission.
Deletes the input characters.
Inserts a pause in the telephone number.
Prints documents when they have been stored in the Memory box,
or when a document has been reception by the memory box.
Receives in memory and designates the printing of reception
documents.
Designates the transfer of reception documents to other faxes.
Designates the confirmation or deletion of memory contents.
Designates the output of each kind of report and list.
Designates the deletion of registration/setting.
Designates the confirmation of registered/set contents.
Used when changing the senders name.
Used when performing a subaddress transmission.
Used when transmitting with a fax standard password.
Designates switching to receive mode.
Connects to information services that accept tone dialing only,
even if you are using a rotary pulse line or enters a plus sign
in a fax number. And enters a plus sign when registering your
fax number.
Press to confirm the dial tone when registering a telephone
number.
Creates a space between rows of numbers or characters.
Use to selecting items on the control panel.
*: Not available on copiers not equipped with the fax function
1-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
B.
Basic operation
The basic operations of the copy keys on the operation panel are listed below.
Details
Selects fixed ratio change (2R2E) or zoom (50 to 200%).
Selects the pick-up cassette.
Selects the scanning density (automatic, F1 to F9) and the
image quality (character, character/photo, photo).
Key name
Reproduction ratio key
Paper selection key
Scanning mode key
Table 1-401
C.
Advanced features
The basic operations of the advanced copy feature keys on the operation panel are
listed below.
Key name
Page separation
Binding margin
Frame erasing
Document frame
erasing
Sheet frame
erasing
Book frame
erasing
Punch hole
erasing
2 in 1 copy
Details
Performs left/right page separation copy in the book mode.
Sets the left and right margins and designates the 2-page
spread copy size.
Creates a binding margin on the paper. Sets the margin
position (left margin, right margin, top margin, bottom margin) and also the margin width (1 to 10mm).
Sets the frame erasing position.
Copies with document frame erasing.
Creates a margin around the outside of the document and
copies.
When copying books, etc., the surrounding and center
margins are deleted.
Erases punch holes from the left margin of copied documents.
Inputs the document size and paper size and designates 2
in 1 copying.
Table 1-402
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-13
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
D.
User mode
When the registration/setting key is pressed on the control panel, the user mode setting screen is displayed.
The construction of the user mode is shown below.
1.
User mode for copies equipped with the fax function
REGISTRATION/SETTING
01 DATA REGISTRATION
01 USER SETTINGS
01 DATE/TIME SETTING
02 UNIT TEL NUMBER
03 UNIT NAME
04 SENDER NAME REG.
05 TX TERMINAL ID
(9)
01 ON
02 OFF
01 TTI POSITION
01 OUTSIDE IMAGE
02 INSIDE IMAGE
02 TEL NUMBER MARK
06 DENSITY CONTROL
01 LIGHT
3
02 STANDARD 5
03 DARK
7
07 PROGRAM KEY REG
01 PRINT REPORT
02 REPORT
03 TONE
04 SENDER'S NAME
05 SUBADDRESS
06 RX MODE
08 OFFHOOK ALARM
01 ON
02 OFF
09 VOLUME CONTROL
01 KEYPAD VOLUME
10 TEL LINE TYPE
11 R-KEY SETTING
01FAX
02 TEL
(1 ~ 3) 1
01 ON
02 OFF
(1 ~ 3) 1
01 ON
02 ALARM VOLUME
02 OFF
(1 ~ 3) 1
01 ON
03 TX DONE TONE
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
(1 ~ 3) 1
01 ON
04 RX DONE TONE
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
05 PRINTING DONE TONE
01 ON
(1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
06 SCANNING DONE TONE 01 ON
(1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
07 COPYING DONE TONE
01 ON
(1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
01 ROTARY PULSE
03 OFF
02 TOUCH TONE
01 PSTN
02 PBX
01 PREFIX
02 HOOKING
03 EARTH CONNECTION
Figure 1-403
1-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
02 REPORT SETTINGS
01 TX REPORT
01 OUTPUT NO
02 PRINT ERROR ONLY
03 OUTPUT YES
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OUTPUT NO
02 PRINT ERROR ONLY
03 OUTPUT YES
02 RX REPORT
03 CONFID. RX REPORT
01 OUTPUT NO
02 OUTPUT YES
04 MEMORY BOX REPORT
01 OUTPUT NO
02 OUTPUT YES
05 ACTIVITY REPORT
01 AUTO PRINT
02 DAILY REPORT TIME
03 TX/RX SEPARATE
01 ON
02 OFF
01 OFF
02 ON REPORT PRINT TIME
01 OFF
02 ON
03 TX SETTINGS
01 ECM TX
01 ON
02 OFF
02 PAUSE TIME
(01 ~ 15) 02 SEC
Figure 1-404
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-15
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
03 AUTO REDIAL
04 BATCH TX
01 REDAIL TIMES
(01 ~ 15) 02 TIMES
02 REDIAL INTERVAL
(02 ~ 99) 02 MIN.
03 TX ERROR RESEND
01 ON
02 OFF
01 ON
02 OFF
01 ON
02 OFF
RESEND TX FROM
01 ALL PAGES
02 ERROR & 1ST PG
03 ERROR PAGE
05 ERASE FAILED TX
01 OFF
02 ON
06 TIME OUT
01 ON
02 OFF
07 STAMP ACTION
01 DIRECT & MEMORY TX
02 DIRECT TX
04 RX SETTINGS
01 ECM RX
01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-405
1-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
02 REMOTE RX
01 ID CALL #
02 HOOK
03 OFF
03 MEMORY RX
01 ON
02 OFF
04 RX PAGE FOOTER
01 OFF
02 ON
05 N ON ONE PRINT
01 OFF
02 ON
REMOTE RX ID
MEMORY RX ALARM
(00 ~ 99, *, #) 25
01 OFF
02 ON
Figure 1-406
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-17
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
05 PRINTER SETTINGS
01 # OF RX COPIES
02 SELECT CASSETTE
(01 ~ 99) 01 COPIES
01 CASSETTE SW A
02 CASSETTE SW B
03 CASSETTE SW C
04 CASSETTE SW D
03 RX REDUCTION
01 ON
02 OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
01 RX REDUCTION
01 AUTO SELECTION
02 FIXED REDUCTION
SELECT REDUCE %
02 SELECT REDUCE DIR
04 PRINT IN ORDER
01 OFF
02 ON
05 TONER SUPPLY LOW
01 RX TO MEMORY
02 KEEP PRINTING
97%
95%
90%
75%
01 VERTICAL ONLY
02 HORIZ & VERTICAL
*1
06 NAME STACK SIZE
01 OFF
02 ON
BYPASS DOC. SIZE
01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
*1 Even when the [NAME STACK SIZE] is set to [OFF], if [STACK BYPASS] is selected by [CASSETTE
ELIGIBLTY] or [SET REPORT CASSETTE], [STACK BYPASS] will automatically come [ON]
Figure 1-407
1-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
07 CASSETTE ELIGIBLTY
01 FAX RECEIVING
01 STACK BYPASS
01 OFF
02 ON
BYPASS DOC. SIZE
02 CASSETTE 1
03 CASSETTE 2
04 CASSETTE 3
05 CASSETTE 4
02 COPY
01 STACK BYPASS
02 CASSETTE 1
03 CASSETTE 2
04 CASSETTE 3
05 CASSETTE 4
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
*1
BYPASS DOC. SIZE
*1
01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
*1 Setting is only possible when a option cassette feeder is installed.
Figure 1-408
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-19
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
08 SET REPORT CASSETTE
01 OFF
02 ON
01 CASSETTE 1
02 CASSETTE 2 *1
03 CASSETTE 3
04 CASSETTE 4
05 STACK BYPASS
BYPASS DOC. SIZE
10 SELECT PAPER
01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
01 OFF
02 ON
09 RX ROTATE PRINT
01 PLAIN PAPER
02 BOND PAPER
03 TRACING PAPER
04 SPECIAL PAPER
06 FILE SETTINGS
01 CONFIDNTL MAILBOX
01 DELETE FILE
02 CHANGE DATA
03 SETUP FILE
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 # OF RX COPIES
(00 ~ 99)
(00 ~ 99)
(00 ~ 99)
*2
PASSWORD ENTER
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 # OF RX COPIES
*2
PASSWORD ENTER
*1 Setting is only possible when a cassette feeder is installed.
*2 When creating a confidential mail box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-409
1-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
02 RELAY TX-GROUP
01 SETUP FILE
01 GROUP DIAL NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 SELECT ORIG UNIT
(00 ~ 99)
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
06 PRINT RX DOC.
07 SELECT LOCATIONS
08 TX REPORT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
(5 TIMES)
01 ON
02 OFF
09 TX START TIME
10 RELAY B'CAST
02 CHANGE DATA
(00 ~ 99)
PASSWORD ENTER
01 GROUP DIAL NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 SELECT ORIG UNIT
06 PRINT RX DOC.
07 SELECT LOCATIONS
08 TX REPORT
09 TX START TIME
10 RELAY B'CAST
03 DELETE FILE
(00 ~ 99)
PASSWORD ENTER
*
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
(5 TIMES)
01 ON
02 OFF
*
* When creating a relay box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-410
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-21
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
03 MEMORY BOX
01 SETUP FILE
(00~99)
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 RX PASSWORD
06 RECEIVE
01 YES
02 NO
01 SELECT ORIG UNIT
02 PRINT RX DOC.
01 OFF
02 ON
01 AUTO
02 MAN.
01 PRINT METHOD
07 TRANSMIT
01 YES
02 NO
01 OFF
02 ON
02 # OF RX COPIES (01~99) 01 COPIES
01 SELECT LOCATIONS
02 TX DOCUMENT
01 RECEIVED
01 NOT TRANSMIT
DOCUMENT 02 TRANSMIT TX REPORT
02 SCAN DOCUMENT
03 TX START TIME
08 POLLING TX
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
01 EVERYDAY
02 SELECT DATS
(5TIMES)
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 YES
02 NO
01 ERASE AFTER TX
02 TX DOCUMENT
01 OFF
02 ON
01 RECEIVED DOCUMENT
02 SCAN DOCUMENT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
Figure 1-411
1-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
02 CHANGE DATA (00~99)
PASSWORD ENTER*
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 RX PASSWORD
01 YES
06 RECEIVE
02 NO
01 SELECT ORIG UNIT
02 PRINT RX DOC.
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
01 AUTO
02 MAN.
01 PRINT METHOD
07 TRANSMIT
01 YES
02 NO
(01~99) 01 COPIES
02 # OF RX COPIES
01 SELECT LOCATIONS
02 TX DOCUMENT
01 RECEIVED DOCUMENT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT TX REPORT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
02 SCAN DOCUMENT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
03 TX START TIME
08 POLLING TX
01 EVERYDAY
(5TIMES)
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
01 YES
06 FRI
02 NO
07 SAT
01 ERASE AFTER TX
02 TX DOCUMENT
03 DELETE FILE
(00~99)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 OFF
02 ON
01 RECEIVED
DOCUMENT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
02 SCAN DOCUMENT
PASSWORD ENTER*
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
* When creating an all-purpose box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-412
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-23
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
04 PRESET POLLING
01 SETUP
FILE
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SELECT LOCATIONS
01EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
04 START TIME
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN (5TIMES)
*1
02 MON (5TIMES)
01 YES
05 RESET POLLING
03 TUE (5TIMES)
02 NO
04 WED (5TIMES)
*2
02 CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD ENTER
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
01 FILE NAME
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 PASSWORD
03 SELECT LOCATIONS
01EVERYDAY
(5TIMES)
04 START TIME
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN (5TIMES)
*1
02 MON (5TIMES)
01 YES
05 RESET POLLING
03 TUE (5TIMES)
02 NO
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
*2
03 DELETE TIME PASSWORD ENTER
05 POLLING BOX
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 ERASE AFTER TX
01 SETUP FILE
02 CHANGE DATA
*3
PASSWORD ENTER
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 ERASE AFTER TX
03 DELETE FILE
*3
PASSWORD ENTER
01 OFF
02 ON
01 OFF
02 ON
*1 Only displayed when the service data SSSW #1 SW09 bit 5 is 1
*2 When creating a fixed time polling box, it is necessary to set a password.
*3 When creating a polling box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-413
1-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
06 TRANSFER
01 SETUP
FILE
01 FILE NAME
02 SELECT LOCATIONS
03 PASSWORD
04 SELECT ORIG UNIT 01 OFF
02 ON
05 TIME SETUP
01 START TIME
02 END TIME
06 PRINT RX DOC.
02 CHANGE DATA
01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 OFF
02 ON (01~99) 01 COPIES
*
PASSWORD ENTER
01 FILE NAME
02 SELECT LOCATIONS
03 PASSWORD
04 SELECT ORIG UNIT
01 OFF
02 ON
* When creating a transfer box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-414
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-25
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
05 TIME SETUP
01 START TIME
02 END TIME
01 EVERY DAY (5TIMES)
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 EVERY DAY (5TIMES)
02 SELECT DAYS
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
06 PRINT RX DOC.
03 DELETE FILE
01 OFF
02 ON (01~99) 01 COPIES
*1
PASSWORD ENTER
07 SYSTEM SETTINGS
*2
PASSWORD ENTER
01 PASSWORD
02 RESTRICTIVE CODES
01 TX SETTINGS
01 OFF
02 ON
DAC SETUP
01 OFF
02 ON
PASSWORD ENTER
ENTER DAC (9)
PASSWORD ENTER
02 PRINTER SETTINGS
01 OFF
02 ON
PASSWORD ENTER
*1 When creating a transfer box, it is necessary to set a password.
*2 Necessary when management password has been registered.
Figure 1-415
1-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
03 MEMORY LOCK RX
01 OFF
02 ON
01 MEM LOCK PASSWORD
02 REPOROT
03 TIME SETUP
01 START TIME
01 EVERYDAY
02 SELECT DAYS
01 OUTPUT YES
02 OUTPUT NO
01 OFF
02 NO
(5TIMES)
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
05 THU
06 FRI
07 SAT
(5TIMES)
01 EVERYDAY
01 SUN
02 SELECT DAYS
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
01 OFF
05 THU
02 NO
06 FRI
07 SAT
'YY MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM'YY
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
02 END TIME
04 RX RESTRICTION
05 DATE SETUP
06 DISPLAY LANGUAGE
07 TX START SPEED
01 14400bps
02 9600bps
03 7200bps
04 4800bps
05 2400bps
06 33600bps
08 RX START SPEED
01 14400bps
02 9600bps
03 7200bps
04 4800bps
05 2400bps
06 33600bps
09 RX PASSWORD
10 ENERGY SAVER
11 PHONE NO.CHECK
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
(5TIMES)
01 ENGLISH
02 FRENCH
03 SPANISH
04 GERMAN
05 ITALIAN
06 DUTCH
07 FINNISH
08 PORTUGUESE
09 NORWEGIAN
10 SWEDISH
11 DANISH
12 SLOVENE
(03~30) 03 MIN.
01 ON
02 OFF
01 OFF
02 NO
Figure 1-416
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-27
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
12 DEFAULT SETTINGS
01 FAX
02 COPY
(1~9) 2MIN.
13 AUTO CLEAR TIME
14 SW AFTER AUTOCLEAR
01 DO NOT RTN TO DFLT
02 RETURN TO DEFAULT
15 FAX DEFAULT
01 OFF
02 STANDARD
03 FINE
04 SUPER FINE
05 ULTRA FINE
01 RESOLUTION
02 SCAN DENSITY
01 OFF
02 LIGHT
03 STADARD
04 DARK
03 IMAGEQUALITY
01 OFF
02 TEXT
03 TEXT/PHOTO
04 HALFTONE
04 BOOK TX SCAN SIZE
08 COPY SETTINGS
01 STD IMAGE QUAL/EXP
LIGHT
AUTO EXPOSUR
DARK
IMAGEQUALITY
02 STD ZOOM RATIO
05 TX MODE
01 MEMORY SENDING
02 DIRECT SENDING
06 TX STAMP
01 TX STAMP OFF
02 TX STAMP ON
01 TEXT
02 TEXT/PHOTO
03 HALFTONE
(050~200) 100%
03 STANDARD COPY QTY
(01~99) 01
04 FRAME ERASE WIDTH
(01~20) 02mm
05 AUTO SORT
01 SHEET
02 A3
03 B4
04 A4R
05 B5
06 A5
01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-417
1-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
01 1-TOUCHN SPD DIAL (01~84)
02 TEL#REGISTRATION
01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY
02 NAME
03 OPTIONAL SETTING
01 OFF
02 ON
01 TX TIME SETTING
(5TIMES)
02 TX TYPE
01 REGULAR TX
01 DOMESTIC
02 INTERNATIONAL(1)
03 INTERNATIONAL(2)
04 INTERNATIONAL(3)
01 33600bit/s
02 14400bit/s
03 9600bit/s
04 4800bit/s
03 INTERNATIONAL
04 TX SPEED
01 ON
02 OFF
05 ECM
(*000~*115)
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY
02 NAME
03 OPTIONAL SETTING
01 OFF
02 ON
(5TIMES)
02 TX TYPE
01 REGULAR
03 INTERNATIONAL
04 TX SPEED
05 ECM
04 SUBADDRESS TX
05 POLLING RX
02 CODED SPD DIAL
01 TX TIME SETTING
02 CONFIDENTIAL TX
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
03 ORIG RLAY TX 01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
01 DOMESTIC
02 INTERNATIONAL(1)
03 INTERNATIONAL(2)
04 INTERNATIONAL(3)
01 33600bit/s
02 14400bit/s
03 9600bit/s
04 4800bit/s
01 ON
02 OFF
02 CONFIDENTIAL TX
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
03 ORIG RLAY TX 01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
04 SUBADDRESS TX
05 POLLING RX
03 GROUP DIAL
(01~56)
01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY
02 NAME
03 TX TIME SETTING
(5TIMES)
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
Figure 1-418
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-29
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
2.
User mode for copies equipped without the fax function
REGISTRATION/SETTING
01 DATE/TIME SETTINGS
(1~3)1
01 ON
02 OFF
(1~3)1
02 ALARM VOLUME
01 ON
02 OFF
(1~3)1
01 ON
03 COPY DONE TONE
(1~3)1
02 ERROR ONLY
03
OFF
01 OFF
03 NAME STACK SIZE
BYPASS DOC.SIZE
01 A3
02 ON
02 A4
04 CASSETTE ELIGIBLTY
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
01 OFF
01 STACK BYPASS
07 B5R
02 ON
BYPASS DOC.SIZE
08 A5R
01 OFF
02 CASSETTE 1
09 11X17
02 ON
10 LTR
*1
01 OFF
03 CASSETTE 2
11 LTRR
02 ON
12 LGL
01 OFF
04 CASSETTE 3
02 ON
01 OFF
05 CASSETTE 4
02 ON
01 KEYPAD VOLUME
02 VOLUME CONTROL
05 SELECT PAPER
01 PLAIN PAPER
02 THICK PAPER
03 THIN PAPER
04 SPECIAL PAPER
06 DATE/SETUP
01 'YY MM/DD
02 MM/DD/YY
03 DD/MM 'YY
07 DISPLAY LANGUAGE
01 ENGLISH
02 FRENCH
03 SPANISH
04 GERMAN
05 ITALIAN
06 DUTCH
07 FINNISH
08 PORTUGUESE
09 NORWEGIAN
10 SWEDISH
11 DANISH
12 SLOVENE
01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11X17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
*1 Setting is only possible when a option cassette feeder is installed.
Figure 1-419
1-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
08 ENERGY SAVER
01 ON
02 OFF
09 AUTO CLEAR TIME
(1~9) 2MIN.
10 STD IMAGE QUAL/EXP
11 STD ZOOM RATIO
(03~30) 03MIN.
4
LIGHT
AUTO EXPOSUR 5
6
DARK
IMAGEQUALITY
(050~200) 100%
12 STANDARD COPY QTY
(01~99) 01
13 FRAME ERASE WIDTH
(01~20) 02mm
14 AUTO SORT
01 TEXT
02 TEXT/PHOTO
03 HALFTONE
01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-420
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-31
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE CARRIED OUT BY
THE USER
Explain carefully to the user that the following part should be thoroughly cleaned
once a week.
1) The copyboard glass should be wiped with a damp cloth and then wiped dry.
2) The copyboard cover and ADF document pressure plate should be wiped with neutral detergent and then wiped dry.
Explain carefully to the user that the following places should be cleaned thoroughly
when the cartridge is exchanged.
1) Using the special tools provided, clean the separation static charge eliminator.
2) Clean away the paper dust from the area around the registration roller (refer to the
diagram below).
Figure 1-501
1-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
VI. SAFETY
A.
1.
Laser beam safety
Laser beam safety
This unit has been approved as a Class 1 product based on the American DHHS
(Department of Health and Human Services) Radiation Performance Standard which
was enacted in 1968.
This means that the laser beam emitted from this unit is not harmful.
The laser scanning assembly of the unit is completely enclosed inside the protective
housing and external covers, therefore there is no leakage of the laser beam from the
unit during customer usage.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL
A RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASER KLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
IN ACCORDO CON LA NORMA
CEI 76-2
Figure 1-601
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-33
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
2.
CDRH Regulations
The American CDRH (Center for Device and Radiological Health), which belongs to
the Food and Drug Administration, enforced regulations regarding laser products on
August 2nd1976.
These regulation apply to all laser products manufactured after August 1st 1976. If
product approval is not given, the product may not be sold in America.
The following label indicates that the product has been approved by the CDRH regulations. All products which are sold in the United States are obligated to have this label
affixed.
CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146, JAPAN.
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CQRH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.
Figure 1-602
Note:
Part of this information may differ depending on the product model.
1-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
3.
Handling the laser unit
When servicing around the unit’s scanning assembly, take particular care not to put
highly reflective tools, such as drivers, etc., in the path of the laser beam.
Also, remove any rings when undertaking maintenance work. (There is a danger that
the laser beam will be reflected into the eyes.)
This unit’s laser beam is infrared. The label in the diagram below is found on covers
which may reflect the laser beam.
Take special care when servicing inside this labeled cover.
This label is on the laser scanning assembly cover inside this unit. There is a danger
of laser radiation leakage from inside this cover.
DANGER - Invisible Laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION - INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D'OUVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT - UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG. WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ATTENZIONE - RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
PRECAUCION - RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYD.
VARO! - AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
VAENING! - OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NAR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
ADVARSEL! - USYNLIG LASER STRÅLING. NÅR DENNA ER ÅBEN.
UNDGÅ BESTRÅLING.
ADVARSEL - USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
RS5 - 8169
Figure 1-603
The above diagram is equipped with an ADF unit.
The main units construction is the same for units whether equipped with the ADF
units, or not.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-35
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
B.
Toner safety
The toner is a non-toxic substance composed of plastic, iron and a small amount of
pigment.
If toner gets onto skin or clothes, wipe off as thoroughly as possible with a dry tissue,
then wash. If warm water is used to clean, the toner gels and soaks permanently into
clothing making it then impossible to clean away the stain. Also, this toner decomposes
easily with vinyl material, therefore avoid contact.
Caution:
Never throw the toner into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
1-36
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
VII. COPYING PROCESS
A.
Outline
The construction of this unit, which employs the indirect method electro-static
process, is shown in Figure 1-701.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
CCD
Lens
Image processing assembly
Photosensitive drum
Laser scanner unit
Cartridge
Developing cylinder
Primary charging roller
Cleaner blade
Paper
Transfer
Fixing Re-charge eliminator
charging roller
assembly
Static charge eliminator
Paper
Figure 1-701
Electrostatic latent image formation block
1.1 Primary charging
2. Laser exposure
3. Developing
8. Drum cleaning
Cartridge
4. Transfer
Delivery
7. Fixing
6. Re-charge
eliminator
5. Separation
Paper flow
Drum rotation direction
Multi feeder
Registration
Cassette
Figure 1-702
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1-37
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
In this unit, the main image formation components; drum, toner, primary charging,
developing and drum cartridge are integrated in a cartridge system.
Furthermore, this unit employs the SURF fixing process; fluorocarbon coated film is
heated and the paper is passed between pressure rollers, thus being fixed by heat and
pressure.
This units image formation process is composed of the following steps.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Primary charging (AC & negative DC)
Laser emission
Developing (AC & negative DC bias)
Transfer (positive DC)
Separation (negative DC)
Re-charge eliminator (positive DC)
Fixing
Drum cleaning
Reference:
Regarding the Re-charge step
In the transfer charging step, the transfer toner image on the paper adheres due to a
positive charge from the back of the paper. This charge is weakened by the separation step, therefore the toner would scatter if moved in this state to the fixing step. In
order to prevent this, the Re-charge eliminator is located before the fixing step., and
positive DC bias is applied to the back of the paper.
Fixing film
Paper
+++
+ + + + + + + + +
Re-charge eliminator
DC bias
Figure 1-703
1-38
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATION
In this chapter the unit’s basic operations, purposes and functions, as well as the
relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, are summarized. An
overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I.
II.
BASIC OPERATION ................................2-1
A. Function configuration........................2-1
B. Copy operation overview ...................2-2
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW .......2-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
III.
IV.
V.
BASIC SEQUENCES...............................2-4
MAIN MOTOR..........................................2-5
PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB
INPUT/OUTPUT.......................................2-6
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
I. BASIC OPERATION
A.
Function configuration
The functions of the unit can broadly be divided into 7 blocks; pick-up/ feeding system, document exposure system, image processing system, laser exposure system,
image formation system, transmission system and the control system.
Document
<Exposure system>
Scanning
Optical path
CCD
Analog processor PCB
Operation panel
<Control system>
<Image processing system>
Image processor PCB
<Laser exposure system>
G3 fax
control unit
*
DC controller PCB
Laser driver PCB
<Image formation system>
Charging
Drum cleaning
Drum
Developing
Separation Transfer
Fixing
Delivery tray
Laser scanner
Multi feeder
Feeding
Main unit cassette
<Pick-up feeding system>
Cassette feeder 1
Accessory
Cassette feeder 2
Cassette feeder 3
*: Only applicable for units equipped with a fax function.
Figure 2-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2-1
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
B.
Copy operation overview
This unit will, depending on the copy mode set by the customer, automatically operate in the direct copy mode or memory copy mode.
Memory copy: After storing all the image data read from one job in the image data
housing memory DRAM (IC7, IC8, IC9, IC10) on the image processor PCB, the printing
operation begins.
The operating conditions for the copy mode and memory copy mode are described
below.
Conditions for the different copying methods
Document scanning mode
Copy mode
Book mode*1
No designation
Sheet mode
Sort mode
For 2 in 1 mode
Other than sort
mode, 2 in 1 mode
No designation
Copy by multi-feeder
pick-up
Number of copies
1 to 99
No designation
No designation
1 sheet
2 sheets or more
No designation
Copy method
Direct copy
Memory copy
Memory copy
Direct copy
Memory copy
Memory copy
*1 Book mode is when the document is set on the copyboard glass and then copied.
*2 Sheet mode is when the document is set in the ADF and then copied.
Table 2-101
Reference:
When copying using the multi-feeder pick-up, memory copying will take place no matter what conditions are in effect.
2-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
II. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW
The main electrical control of the unit is performed by the IC on the image processor
PCB and the IC on the DC controller PCB.
Furthermore, the unit is equipped with 2 backup lithium batteries on the image
processor PCB.
The function of each PCB is listed below.
• Image processor PCB
IC No.
IC26 (CPU)
IC15
IC28
IC29
IC38
IC41
ICI, IC2 (on ROM DIMM)
IC7, IC8, IC9, IC10
IC36, IC37
Function overview
• Sequence control
• Serial I/F control
• Timer control
• Interrupt control
• DRAM control
• Control panel and transmission control
• DMA control
• DC controller PCB and transmission control
• ADF motor control
• Control panel display control
• Image processing control (shading control)
• Analogue processor PCB transmission control
• Image processing control (half tone processing, binarisation processing)
• Image reduction and enlargement
• Control program built-in flash ROM)
• Image data storage DRAM
• Storage SRAM for service mode, user mode, and other
parameters
Table 2-201
• DC controller PCB
IC No.
IC301 (CPU)
Function overview
• Print operation program built-in
• Print process control
• Motor, clutch sensor, etc., load control
• High voltage output control
• Cassette feeder operation control
• Jam detection
• Laser scanner drive control
Table 2-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2-3
2-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Delivery sensor (FM301)
Delivery sensor (PS306)
Developing bias AC
Developing bias DC
Laser exposure
Laser scanner motor (M801)
Re-charge eliminator bias
Separation static charge eliminator bias
Transfer charging roller bias
Primary charging roller bias AC
Primary charging roller bias DC
Paper width sensor (PS304)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS301)
Registration sensor (PS302)
Registration clutch (CL302)
Pick-up sensor (PS303)
Pick-up vertical path clutch (CL301)
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL302)
Shading measurement
Scanning lamp
Scanner HP sensor (PS101)
Document scanner motor (M701)
Fixing heater
Main motor (M601)
Negative bias
150˚C control
INTR1
Power ON
INTR2
Paper interval bias
STBY
Start ON
forward
SCFW
General timing chart
• Conditions: Copy / A4 paper / main unit cassette pick-up / 3 sheets
backward
SCRV
SCRV
Paper interval bias
160˚C control
SCFW
SCFW
SCRV
Negative bias
LSTR
90 sec.
STBY
ESS
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
III. BASIC SEQUENCES
Figure 2-301
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
IV. MAIN MOTOR
1.
Overview
The rotation and stopping of the main motor (M601) is controlled by the drive signal
output from DC controller PCB.
The DC controller PCB changes the speed in accordance with the print resolution.
2.
Rotation operation
The unit’s main motor has a Hall element built-in 3 phase DC brushless motor, and
is integrated with the motor drive circuit.
When the main motor drive signal (MMD*) from the DC controller PCB is “0”, the
main motor begins to rotate, and when it reaches the designated rotation, the main
motor ready signal (MRDY*) signal changes to “0”.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) judges that there is a motor malfunction when
the following situations occur, and displays the error code “##325”.
1) When the MRDY* does not change to “0” 100ms after the main motor’s drive has
started.
2) When the MRDY* signal has changed to “0”, but does not revert to “1” after 0.1s of
continuous rotation.
Main motor driver PCB
+24V
0V
DC controller PCB
J304-9
-6
MMD*
Drive
control
circuit
MRDY*
Driver
circuit
Main motor
(M601)
Rotation speed
detection
Reference
signal
generation
Figure 2-401
Related error code
###325: Main motor / exhaust fan malfunction
Related service mode
The print status is displayed by pressing TEST>6:FACULTY TEST>6-3:SENSOR> on
the input numeric key 7. Check the condition of the main motor malfunction using the
status 35 feeding unit malfunction detailed status Bit 6.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2-5
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
V. PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB INPUT / OUTPUT
Image processor PCB input / output (1/2)
Image processor PCB
Scanner home
position sensor
Copyboard cover
open/shut sensor
PS101
PS102
+5V
J212-1
-3 PS101S When the scanner is in the home position: “1”
(When the light-blocking plate is in PS101)
-2
+5V
J216-1
-3 PS102S When the copyboard cover or the ADF
is shut: “1”
-2
(When the light-blocking plate is in PS102)
Analogue processor
PCB
An actual check is not possible, therefore an explanation
of the signal name has been omitted.
Control panel PCB
An actual check is not possible, therefore an explanation
of the signal name has been omitted.
Control panel sub
PCB
Figure 2-501
2-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
Image processor PCB input / output (2/2)
Image processor PCB
Document
scanner
motor
J214-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
M61
CN1-1 Inverter printed
-2
circuit board
Refer to P. 3-3
J207
An actual check is not possible, therefore an explan
ation of the signal name has been omitted.
Refer to P.3-4
Scanner lamp
Speaker
J211-1
-2
Stamp
solenoid *1
+24V
J219-1
When “0” , the SL303 is ON
-2 STMP* (the document is stamped)
SL303
DC power supply
PCB
J209
An actual check is not possible, therefore an
explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
DC controller PCB
J201
An actual check is not possible, therefore
an explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
FAX modem board *2
J202 An actual check is not possible, therefore
an explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
To the ADF relay
PCB
J205 Refer to the ADF service manual
Figure 2-502
*1 This function only applies to units equipped with the ADF.
*2 Is only installed if the unit is equipped with a FAX function.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2-7
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
DC controller PCB input / output (1/3)
DC controller PCB
Paper leading
edge sensor
Registration sensor
Paper sensor
PS301
PS302
PS303
Paper width sensor
Cassette
paper sensor
PS304
PS305
+5V
J306-1
-2 PS301S* When the PS301 detects paper: “0”
(When the light-blocking plate
-3
is not in PS301)
+5V
J303-1
-2 PS302S* When the PS302 detects paper: “0”
-3
(When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS302)
+5V
When the PS303 detects paper: “0”
J303-4
-6 PS303S* (When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS303)
-5
When the unit is on standby,
this sensor detects right lower cover
+5V
open / close
J306-4
-5 PS304S* When the PS304 detects paper: “0”
-6
(When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS304)
+5V
J306-7
-8
PS305S
-9
J302-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Cassette paper size
detection switch
PSIZ3
PSIZ2
When paper is in the cassette: “1”
(When the light-blocking plate
is in PS305)
Refer to P.7-6
PSIZ1
PSIZ0
+24V
J312-4
Front cover open /
shut sensor
-1
CVROPN When the front cover is open: “1”
SW301
Multi-feeder
paper sensor
PS501
Test print
output switch
SW501
+5V
J309-8
-7
-6 PS501S*
-3
-2 TSTON*
-1
-4
-5
When paper is in the cassette: “0”
(When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS501)
When the switch is pushed: “0”
Sensor printed circuit board
Figure 2-503
2-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
DC controller PCB input / output (2/3)
DC controller PCB
Pick-up vertical
path clutch
CL301
CL302
Registration clutch
SL301
Pick-up solenoid
Multi-feeder
pick-up solenoid
SL302
M601
Main motor
M701
Laser scanner motor
BD PCB
+24V
J307-4
-3 CL301D*
When “0”, CL301 is ON
+24V
J307-5
-6 CL302D*
When “0”, CL302 is ON
+24V
J306-11
-10 SL301D* When “0”, CL301 is ON
+24V
J307-2
-1 SL302D*
J304-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
When “0”, SL302 is ON
Refer to P.2-5
+24V
J304-1
-2 ACC
-3 DEC
-4
+5V
J304-12
-13 BDI
-14
Laser scanner motor acceleration signal
Laser scanner motor deceleration signal
BD input signal (pulse signal)
Laser scanner
unit
+5V
Laser driver
PCB
Fan
FM301
Refer to P.5-4
J308-7
-8
-6
Refer to P.9-7
Figure 2-504
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2-9
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
DC controller PCB input / output (3/3)
DC controller PCB
J308-3
Delivery input signal
-5
PS306 When PS306 detects paper: “0”
-2
(When the light-blocking plate
-4
is not in PS306)
-1
TH1 Fixing heater surface temperature
detection signal (Analog signal)
J305-1
RLYD
When “1” relay is ON
-11
FSRDRV1 When “1” heater 1 is ON
Delivery PS306
sensor
TSW1
Fixing assembly
-13
RL1
FU1
-5
FU2
Heater 2
Heater 1
TH1
J103-1
-3
FSRDRV2 When “1” heater 2 is ON
-14 ZEROX
ZEROX Temperature
adjustment reference signal
DC power supply
PCB
JH401
Primary charging roller
JH402
Developing cylinder
JH403
High-voltage
output circuit
(refer to P.9-4)
Transfer charging roller
JH404
Separation static charge eliminator
JH405
Re-charge eliminator
JH406
Remaining toner sensor
Figure 2-505
2-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
In this chapter the purpose and functions of the unit’s scanner system drive and document sensors, etc. as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical
systems is summarized. An overview of each parts operation timing is also included.
I.
II.
OPERATION OVERVIEW........................3-1
A. Overview ............................................3-1
B. Exposure system sequence ...............3-2
SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM....................3-3
A. Document scanner motor...................3-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
III.
B. Charging the magnification ratio ........3-4
C. Scanning lamp control .......................3-4
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................3-5
A. Scanning lamp ...................................3-6
B. Document scanning motor .................3-8
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I. OPERATION OVERVIEW
A.
Overview
The image exposure system’s function is to expose the document, and irradiate the
CCD with the reflected light.
The scanning lamp irradiates the document and the light from this is reflected by 4
mirrors, converged by a lens and then transmitted to the CCD. The reflected light in the
CCD is then image processed with a scanning resolution of 400 × 600pdi.
Figure 3-101 is a cross sectioned diagram of the image exposure system, and
Figure 3-102 is an external view diagram.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Forward (document scanner)
Mirror 1
Mirror 3
Mirror 4
Lens
CCD light receiving unit
Analog processor PCB
Figure 3-101
Document scanner motor (M701)
Light-blocking plate
Forward
Scanner home position
sensor (PS101)
Mirror mount 1
Mirror mount 2
Backward
Figure 3-102
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
3-1
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B.
Exposure system sequence
Start
key ON
INTR SCFW
SCRV
Document scanner
motor (M701)
LSTR STBY
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
Scanner home
position sensor (PS101)
Scanning lamp
Figure 3-103
3-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM
A.
Document scanner motor
The document scanner motor (M701) uses a 2 phase excitation stepping motor
which is controlled by the image processor PCB.
The image processor’s PCB drive control IC (IC15) sends instructions for the clockwise rotation (scanner forward movement), anti-clockwise rotation (scanner backward
movement) and the rotation speed to the motor driver IC (IC3). The motor driver IC (IC3)
supplies power to the document scanner in compliance with the clock signal which is
sent with this control instruction.
Reference:
In the event of a failure such as a blown fuse in the document scanner motor, 24 V
continues to be supplied to the motor driver’s IC (IC3) which causes the IC’s surface
temperature to increase. Consequently, a thermoswitch has been installed in the
motor driver IC (IC3) for its protection. When the IC surface temperature reaches 115
± 5°C the thermoswitch’s contact is released, cutting off the 24V power supply to the
motor driver IC (IC3).
If it is not possible to replace this thermoswitch, or if the switch has tripped because
the temperature does not return to normal, eliminate the cause of the temperature
increase, and then replace the image processor PCB.
Image processor PCB
+24V
Thermo
switch
Document scanner motor
A
COM
Drive
control IC
(IC15)
Motor
driver IC
(IC3)
M701
A*
B
COM
Clock pulse
B*
Related service mode
By setting service mode>#10 CS SET>, the Mirror 1 mount will be moved to the factory setting position.
Figure 3-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
3-3
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B.
Changing the magnification ratio
The magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction (drum axis direction) is
changed by line skipping (for reducing) when writing the image signal to the line memory, or double scanning (for enlarging) when reading out from the line memory.
The magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction is changed by increasing
the speed of the mirror mounts movement (when reducing), or reducing the movement
speed (when enlarging).
C.
Scanning lamp control
This unit’s scanning lamp uses a xenon tube.
The ON/OFF control of the scanning lamp is performed by the scanning lamp lighting control IC (IC38) which is on the image processor PCB.
Based on the scanning lamps drive signal (LMPON), which is output from the scanning lamp lighting control IC (IC38), the inverter PCB drive circuit comes into operation,
causing 24V to be supplied to the scanning lamp via the scanning lamp lighting circuit.
Image processor
PCB
+24V
Scanning
lamp lighting
control IC
(IC38)
Inverter PCB
J207-3
[1] LMPON
Drive
circuit
Scanning lamp
xenon tube
Scanning
lamp lighting
circuit
[1] LMPON: Scanning lamp drive signal
Related service mode
Service mode>TEST MODE>5:AGING TEST (Number Key 5)
Scanning lamp lighting, ADF motor operation, oblique line pattern print
Figure 3-202
3-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
3-5
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
A.
Scanning lamp
1) Remove the ADF or pressure plate
(Refer to P.3-1 of the ADF service
manual).
2) Remove the 2 installation screws,
and then remove the copyboard
glass stay.
[1]
3) Remove the copyboard glass.
4) Remove 2 of each of the installation
screws, then remove the upper rear
cover [1] and the upper front cover
[2].
5) Slowly move the Mirror 1 mount
assembly from the home position
about 10cm to the right.
[2]
Figure 3-301
6) Remove the installation screw [3],
and then remove the inverter PCB
cover [4]
[3]
[4]
Figure 3-302
3-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Remove one of the inverter PCB’s [5]
connectors (CN2) [6].
[5]
[6]
Figure 3-303
8) Insert a screwdriver into the upper
frame metal sheet’s front and back
holes, and prise loose the 2 installation pins.
9) Removed a scanning lamp at slide.
Figure 3-304
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
3-7
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B.
Document scanning
motor
[1]
[2]
1) Remove the 4 installation screws and
remove the main unit’s rear cover.
2) Remove the copyboard cover open /
shut sensor’s connector [1]
3) Remove the installation screw [2],
and remove the copyboard cover
open / shut sensor together with the
sensor holder.
Figure 3-305
The above diagram shows the configuration of units equipped with an ADF.
The configuration of the main unit is
also the same for units which are not
equipped with an ADF.
4) Remove the document scanner
motor’s [3] connector [4].
[3]
[6]
[4]
5) Remove the 4 installation screws [5].
6) Remove the tension spring [6], and
while removing the drive belt from the
motor gear, remove the document
scanner motor together with the support plate.
Caution:
When installing the document scanner
motor, lock in position with a installation screw after pulling the tension
spring between the motor and the
main unit. If the spring is locked in
position before it has been stretched,
the drive belt will not have the correct
tension which could lead to faulty
operation of the scanner.
3-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
[5]
Figure 3-306
The above diagram shows the configuration of units equipped with an ADF.
The configuration of the main unit is
also the same for units which are not
equipped with an ADF.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
In this chapter the unit’s CCD/Analog processor PCB, analog image processing and
digital image processing are summarized.
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................4-1
ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING.............4-2
A. Overview ............................................4-2
B. CCD/CCD drive circuit .......................4-2
C. A-D conversion circuit /
ABC circuit .........................................4-3
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING..............4-4
A. Overview ............................................4-4
B. Shading correction .............................4-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
IV.
C. Magnification ratio process ................4-7
D. Edge emphasis / smoothing
process ..............................................4-7
E. Logarithmic correction........................4-8
F. Half tone density processing ..............4-9
G. Binarisation ........................................4-9
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................4-10
A. CCD unit ..........................................4-11
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW
The image processing system changes the optical image, which has been irradiated
onto the CCD, into an electrical signal (image signal), and then corrects and processes
it.
Analog processor
PCB
Image processor
PCB
A-D
conversion
circuit
Shading
correction
circuit
Image
processing
circuit
Binarization
CCD
Laser driver
PCB
Photosensitive
drum
Laser
drive circuit
DC controller
PCB
Laser
exposure
control circuit
Figure 4-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-1
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING
A.
Overview
The analog processor PCB converts the CCD drive control and CCD output signals
(analog signals) into digital signals. It also controls the AE.
B.
CCD/CCD drive circuit
The CCD is a linear image sensor with 5000 pixel per line (light receiving unit). The
signal which has undergone photoelectric conversion at the light receiving unit is output
separately as even number pixels and odd number pixels, and is transmitted to the CCD
drive circuit. The CCD drive circuit then synthesizes the separately output odd number
and even number pixel signals, and outputs the synthesized signal to the A-D conversion circuit.
Analog processor PCB
CCD
Odd number
pixel signal
Image signal
(analog)
CCD drive circuit
Even number
pixel signal
A-D
conversion
circuit
Image signal
(digital)
Reference
voltage circuit
ABC circuit
ABC setting signal
ABC circuit off signal
Analog signal setting signal
Clock pulse
Figure 4-201
4-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
C.
A-D conversion circuit / ABC circuit
The CCD’s PCB A-D conversion circuit converts the analog image signal (voltage
signal), which has been sent from the CCD, into an 8 bit digital image signal.
The A-D conversion circuit performs A-D conversion processing based on the reference voltage. By increasing or decreasing the reference voltage, the density range (the
difference between the max. output level and min. output level) of each pixel will also
increase or decrease, therefore it has an affect on the signal level after the A-D conversion.
The ABC (Auto Background Control) function applies this characteristic, and
changes the reference voltage in accordance with the output signal from the A-D conversion circuit, and by altering the density range, converts the documents background
density. This technique is used for adjusting the density when copying from a coloured
background document to one with a white background.
As show in figure 4-202, in the case of a document with a coloured background, by
lowering the density range compared to a white background, the coloured background is
erased.
When the unit’s copy function density adjustment is set at “Auto”, the ABC function
comes into operation automatically. After A-D conversion, the image signal is returned
by the ABC circuit, and judgement of the A-D conversion circuit output signal level takes
place, the reference voltage is converted in accordance with the judgement results. ABC
control takes place by the voltage being input into the A-D conversion circuit,.
<Coloured background document>
<White background documen>
Document
surface
By means of the ABC
circuit, the reference
voltage changes and
the FFH (white) level
is lowered.
(The density level is
decreased)
FFH (white)
Output level
FFH (white)
A
B
00H (black)
00H (black)
A : White background document density range
B : Coloured background document density range
Figure 4-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-3
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
A.
Overview
The digital image processing assembly processes the image signals sent from the
Analog processor PCB.
The following block figure shows the contents of the image processing.
Image processor PCB
Analog
processor
PCB
Shading
correction
Magnification ratio
processing
• Edge
emphasis
• Smoothing
DC
controller
PCB
Binarization
Density
processing
Logarithmic
correction
Figure 4-301
4-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
B.
Shading correction
Even when reflected light from a document with even density is detected by the
CCD, the CCD output will not be consistent for the following reasons.
Reason 1: There is variation in the photosensitivity of the individual CCD pixels.
Reason 2: The volume of light filtered through the lens center and the peripheral
areas is different.
Reason 3: The volume of light from the scanning lamp centre and ends is different.
Reason 4: The scanning lamp’s quality gradually deteriorates. Shading is performed
in order to correct the above.
There are two types of shading correction; shading correction for every copy and the
automatic shading (the value of which is set in the service mode).
a.
Shading target value setting
The automatic shading correction is operated and executed by TEST MODE 2:CCD
in the service mode.
This operation measures and records the density of the white reference plate
(behind the copyboard glass). The memorized data are arithmetically processed and
used as the ‘target value’ when correcting the shading.
b.
Shading correction
In this operation, the scanning lamp light irradiates the white reference plate, (refer
to Figure 4-302) and the volume of that reflected light is digitized by the analog image
processing assembly. The digitized reflected light volume is input as shading data into
the image processor PCB’s shading circuit.
The memorized target value and the shading data are arithmetically processed. The
result is then set as the shading correction value.
The shading correction value corrects the unevenness in the CCD’s pixels at the
time of document scanning, and is used to create image density uniformity.
Shading correction takes place at the following times:
• When the power is switched ON.
• When the number of pages in a document is between 1 and 19, shading correction
occurs before the first page is scanned.
• When performing continuous copying (copying 20 pages or more), shading correction takes place before the first page is scanned and then once every 20 pages
(after the previous shading correction has taken place, it will take place again after
scanning the 20th page).
• For Fax transmissions, shading correction takes place before scanning the first
page. (Shading correction only takes place once regardless of the number of
pages).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-5
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
White reference plate
Copy board glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Mirror 1
Mirror 3
Mirror 4
Lens
CCD
Figure 4-302
CCD output
After correction
Target value
Measured data
Before correction
White reference plate
Document density
Figure 4-303
Related service mode
Shading automatic adjustment:
Control panel RMSW ON, Service mode> TEST MODE>2:CCD (Numeric key 2 >
Numeric key 8 >
4-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
C.
Magnification ratio process
The magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction (drum axis direction) is
changed by line skipping (for reducing) when writing the image signal to the line memory, or double scanning (for enlarging) when reading out from the line memory.
The magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction is changed by increasing
the speed of the mirror mount’s movement (when reducing), or reducing the movement
speed (when enlarging).
D.
Edge emphasis / smoothing process
When the character mode is selected on the control panel, edge emphasis processing takes place. When the photo mode is selected, smoothing processing takes place.
When edge emphasis processing takes place, it is possible to emphasize an image’s
gradation variations thus producing a more distinct image. Conversely, the smoothing
process softens the image’s gradation variations, and produces a softer image. When
copying a photo, the smoothing process makes the moiré effect less conspicuous.
Black 255
200
1 pixel
100
Horizontal scanning direction
White
0
After output
Black 255
Black 255
200
200
100
100
Horizontal scanning direction
White
0
After output
Horizontal scanning direction
White
0
After output
Edge emphasis process
Smoothing process
Figure 4-304
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-7
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
E.
Logarithmic correction
The CCD output has linear characteristics with regards to the reflected light from the
document, however, the density seen by the eye when looking at a document is not linear in relation to reflected light.
Figure 4-305 shows the relationship between the document density seen by the eye,
and that of the CCD output.
In order to correct this, the level is adjusted, using the correction curve shown in
Figure 4-306.
CCD output
Output level
25
25
0
Black
0
White
Document density
Figure 4-305
4-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
0
25
Input level
Figure 4-306
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
F.
Half tone density processing
The half tone density processing correction curve changes depending on the following:
• The copy density setting on the control panel
• The scanning mode (character, character/photo, photo)
In accordance with the copy density setting on the control panel, there is either a
light image or a dark image curve as shown in Figure 4-307.
Furthermore, when photo mode is selected in the scanning mode, the gradation
characteristics are good, and the curve faithfully reproduces the document’s density as
shown in Figure 4-308.
Copy density
Copy density
Character
mode
Dark
image
Character /
photo mode
and photo
mode
Light
image
Character
mode
Document density
Figure 4-307
G.
Document density
Figure 4-308
Binarisation
After the half tone processing has finished, multi-value data are converted into binary data.
The binarisation technique which the unit uses employs is the error diffusion system.
The data which have been binarised are sent to the DC controller PCB with a
recording resolution of 1200 x 600pdi equivalent.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-9
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
IV. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
4-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
A.
CCD unit
1) Remove the 2 installation screws,
remove the copyboard glass stay,
and then take out the copyboard
glass.
2) Unclip the tab [1] and remove the
CCD connector [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-401
3) Remove the analog processor PCB
connector [3] and flat cable [4].
[4]
[3]
[5]
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [5]
and then remove the CCD unit.
[5]
Figure 4-402
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
4-11
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 5
LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
In this chapter the operation, purpose and function of the unit’s laser exposure
process, as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, is
summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................5-1
BD SIGNAL GENERATION .....................5-3
A. Overview ............................................5-3
B. BD generation / detection ..................5-3
LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT .......................5-4
A. Operation ...........................................5-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
IV.
V.
B. Laser light intensity control ................5-4
LASER SCANNER MOTOR
CONTROL................................................5-6
A. Operation outline................................5-6
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................5-7
A. Laser scanner unit .............................5-8
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW
The principal parts making up the laser scanner unit are; the laser beam generating
laser unit, the laser scanner motor which contains a six sided mirror for laser scanning
and a BD sensor PCB for detection the laser beam.
The laser beam generated by the laser unit illuminates the 6 sided mirror, which
rotates at a fixed speed. The laser beam reflected by the 6 sided mirror is filtered
through a condensing lens in order to be focussed on the photosensitive drum. The optic
path is bent by the lens mirror, and the beam arrives at the photosensitive drum. Then,
the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror installed in the laser scanner unit is illuminated onto the BD sensor PCB. (Refer to Figure 5-102)
When the 6 sided mirror is rotating at a fixed speed, the laser beam is scanned onto
the photosensitive drum at a fixed speed, the static charge eliminated and then an electrostatic latent image formed.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Mirror 1
Mirror 4
Mirror 3
Image processor
PCB
Lens
CCD light receiving unit
Analog processor PCB
Laser mirror
DC controller
PCB
Laser
driver
Laser beam
Laser scanner unit
Photosensitive
drum
Figure 5-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
5-1
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
VDO*
VDO
Image processor PCB
6 sided mirror
Laser scanner motor
Condensing
lens
BD signal
Laser scanner
motor drive
signal
Laser drive
signal
DC controller PCB
BD sensor PCB
Laser mirror
Laser unit
Laser driver PCB
BD mirror
Photosensitive drum
Figure 5-102
Related error code
##0323: Laser scanner assembly BD signal output error
Laser scanner motor rpm error
Related service mode
The printer status is displayed as follows: Service mode > TEST MODE> 6: FACULTY
TEST>6-3: SENSOR> Press Numeric key 5. Check the main motor fault condition by
status 8 service technician call status Bit 2.
5-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
II. BD SIGNAL GENERATION
A.
Overview
When the laser is illuminated onto the photosensitive drum, a laser emission start
signal (horizontal sync. signal) is necessary. The laser beam sensor signal is used to
generate this start signal.
B.
BD generation / detection
The DC controller PCB CPU outputs the laser forced light signal (LON*) at “0”,
based on the BDI* signal, and forcibly emits the laser. The laser beam is reflected by the
BD mirror and then input in the BD sensor PCB. BD sensor PCB detects this laser beam
and generates a BD input signal (BDI*), then sends it to the DC controller PCB CPU
(IC301). The CPU (IC301) generates a horizontal sync. signal (BDO*) based on the
BDI* signal, and outputs it to the image processor PCB.
Back
Front
Photosensitive drum
BD sensor PCB
BD input signal (BDI)
BD mirror
Laser
Collimator lens
Polygon mirror
(6 sided)
Laser scanner unit
DC controller PCB
Laser forced light emission signal (LON*)
Horizontal sync.
Image processor
signal (BDO)
PCB
Figure 5-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
5-3
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
III. LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT
A.
Operation
This circuit turns the laser diode (LD) ON at a fixed light intensity. The fixed beam is
based on a video signal (VDO*, VDO) which is sent from the image processor PCB via
the DC controller PCB.
The binarised image signal is converted to a VDO signal with the low amplitude differential VDO* signal, inside the image processor PCB, and sent to the DC controller
PCB. Then, it is sent unchanged to the laser driver PCB receiver. The receiver returns
the low amplitude differential signal to its original form and sends it as a video out signal
(VDOUT* signal) to the logic circuit inside the laser driver.
When the image formation enabling signal (ENBL*) from the DC controller PCB
(IC30) is “0”, the laser driver PCB, turns the laser diode ON/OFF in accordance with the
VDOUT* signal. Furthermore, when the print resolution is output by 1200 dpi equivalent
or by 600dpi, by changing the laser light intensity switching signal (600*), the laser light
intensity can be altered. By changing the laser light intensity switching signal to “1” when
1200 dpi equivalent, and to “0” when 600pdi equivalent, the laser light intensity is
switched by the laser driver IC power adjustment circuit.
B.
Laser light intensity control
The laser (semiconductor laser) has the characteristic that the light intensity will fluctuate greatly when the ambient temperature changes. Therefore, the laser drive current
is controlled to change automatically with the changes in the light intensity.
When the laser diode emits light, the laser elements built-in photo-diode receives the
laser beam, and returns the received light output voltage, which corresponds to the
strength of the light intensity, to the laser driver IC control amplifier circuit. At the control
amplifier circuit, the electrical current which was set at the photo diode output voltage
and the power adjustment circuit is compared, and the electrical current flow to the laser
diode is controlled. This laser control takes place constantly during laser beam emission.
5-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
DC controller PCB
Laser driver PCB
+5V
Laser
element
LD
CPU
(IC301)
PD
[1] ENBL*
Logic circuit
Image
processor
PCB
[2] VDO*
[2] VDO
[5] VDOUT*
Drive
circuit
Receiver
[3] 600*
Power
adjustment
circuit
[4] BDI*
[1] ENBL* : Image formation enabling signal
[3] 600* : Laser beam changeover signal
[5] VDOUT* : Video out signal
Control
amplifier
circuit
BD sensor PCB
[2] VDO*/VDO : Video signal
[4] BDI* : BD input signal
Figure 5-301
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
5-5
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
IV. LASER SCANNER MOTOR CONTROL
A.
Operation outline
The laser scanner motor is a 3 phase 8 pole DC brushless motor integrated, with the
laser scanner motor drive circuit.
The laser scanner motor rotates when receiving the instruction from the DC controller PCB. The supply of electrical power to the motor is controlled inside the scanner
driver PCB.
When the scanner motor acceleration signal (ACC*) is output from the DC controller
PCB, electrical power is supplied from the scanner driver PCB motor drive circuit, and
the laser scanner motor rotation is maintained.
When the laser scanner motor is rotating by the CPU forcing the laser to emit light, a
BDI* signal is sent from the BD sensor PCB to the DC controller PCB. The DC controller
PCB’s CPU detects the BDI* signal cycle, and the ACC* signal controls the laser scanner motor rotation until it reaches the stipulated rotation count.
Furthermore, when stopping the laser scanner motor, the CPU changes the scanner
motor deceleration signal (DEC*) to “0”, and stops the motor’s rotation.
DC controller PCB
BD input signal (BDI*)
BD sensor PCB
24VA
Laser scanner motor
driver PCB
Laser scanner motor
Scanner motor acceleration
signal (ACC*)
Scanner motor deceleration
signal (DEC*)
Motor drive circuit
6 sided mirror
Laser
scanner
motor
Figure 5-401
5-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main units metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
5-7
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
A.
Laser scanner unit
1) Remove the printer from the main
body. (Refer to 9-19)
2) Remove the mylar sheet [1] and the
sponge [2] from the upper part of the
laser scanner unit.
[2]
[1]
Figure 5-501
3) Remove the 3 connectors [3] which
are connected to the laser scanner
unit. Then, after removing the 4
installation screws [4], remove the
laser scanner unit [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
Figure 5-502
5-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
In this chapter the operation, purpose and function of this unit’s image formation
process as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems is
summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I.
II.
III.
OVERVIEW..............................................6-1
A. Construction .......................................6-1
PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS
CONTROL................................................6-3
A. Outline ...............................................6-3
B. Control operation ...............................6-3
TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS
CONTROL................................................6-4
A. Overview ............................................6-4
B. Bias control ........................................6-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
IV.
SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE
ELIMINATOR BIAS CONTROL ...............6-6
A. Operation ...........................................6-6
V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL ..............6-7
A. Outline ...............................................6-7
B. Operation ...........................................6-7
VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL................6-8
A. Operation ...........................................6-8
VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION ......................6-9
A. Operation ...........................................6-9
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW
A.
Construction
The principal components of image formation system are shown in the diagram
below.
This unit’s image formation system uses a cartridge system. The principal components are the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, processing cylinder, drum
cleaner and toner. These are integrated to form the cartridge system.
The DC controller PCB has a built-in high-voltage output assembly, and high-voltage
is output for the charging, with the designated timing.
DC power
supply PCB
Cartridge
JH401
JH402
JH406
Primary charging roller
Blade
DC controller
PCB
Toner sensor
Developing cylinder
Drum
Highvoltage
output unit
Re-charge
eliminator
Charge
eliminator
Transfer charging roller
JH403
JH404
JH405
Figure 6-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
6-1
6-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Re-charging bias
Developing bias AC component
Developing bias DC component
Separation static charge eliminator bias
Transfer charging roller bias
Primary charging roller bias AC component
Primary charging roller bias DC component
Paper leading edge sensor (PS301)
Registration sensor (PS302)
Registration clutch (CL302)
Pick-up sensor (PS303)
Pick-up vertical path clutch (CL301)
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL301)
Scanning lamp
Scanner HP sensor (PS101)
Document scanner motor (M701)
Fixing heater
Main motor (M601)
negative bias
150˚C control
INTR1
Power ON
STBY
Paper interval bias
INTR2
Start key ON
forward
SCFW
backward
SCRV
Paper interval bias
160˚C control
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
negative bias
STBY
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
■ High voltage related output sequence
Conditions: When copying 2 sheets of A4 size paper.
Figure 6-102
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
II. PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS CONTROL
A.
Outline
The primary charging roller bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). AC bias as well as DC bias is applied to the primary charging roller in order to
stabilize the charging.
• DC bias fixed voltage control
• AC bias fixed current control
• Bias switching control
B.
Control operation
The outputs of the DC bias and AC bias, which are applied to the primary charging
roller, are controlled by the DC (DCPWM) control signal and AC (PRACON) control signal respectively, which are output from the CPU (IC301). The DC bias, which is output
from the DC drive unit, is detected by the DC voltage sensor circuit, and is fed back to
the DC drive circuit via the comparison circuit. In this way, the CPU controls the primary
high-voltage DC component (constant voltage control).The AC bias output is detected
by the AC current control circuit, is fed back to the AC drive circuit via the comparison
circuit, and controlled by the CPU (constant current control).
Furthermore, the bias output to the primary charging roller of this unit changes
depending on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent or 600dpi equivalent).
The bias output switches between the DC and AC drive circuits, in response to the
bias switching signal (1200dpi equivalent) from the CPU.
DC controller PCB
AC drive
JH401
Primary charging roller
Superimpose
AC voltage
control
Comparison
[1] PRACON
[2] 1200DPI
Photosensitive
CPU
(IC301)
Bias switching
drum
Comparison
DC drive
[1] PRACON: AC control signal
[2] 1200DPI: Bias switching signal
[3] DCWM: DC control signal
[3] DCPWM
DC voltage
control
Figure 6-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
6-3
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
III. TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS CONTROL
A.
Overview
This unit employs the roller direct transfer charging system. There are 4 types of
transfer charging roller bias, their respective roles and timings are explained below.
1.
Transfer bias
Positive voltage is applied by this bias, which transfers the toner from the photosensitive drum to the paper.
2.
Cleaning bias
Because a direct transfer system is employed, there are times when, because of
jams, etc., the toner on the drum adheres to the transfer charging roller. In order to clean
this toner off, negative voltage is applied at the times below, causing the toner which has
adhered to the transfer charging roller to return to the photosensitive drum. The output
of this negative voltage is as follows:
• During forward rotation
• During part of backward rotation
3.
Reference bias
Due to fluctuations in the environment, or the transfer charging roller’s resistance,
there is the possibility that the transfer effectiveness will fluctuate. In order to minimise
image deterioration caused by this, the transfer charging roller bias applied voltage level
is compensated.
The reference bias is applied when the start key is pushed, and the voltage level
compensated.
4.
Paper interval bias
When performing continuous printing, the bias value is lowered to prevent the toner
between the paper adhering to the transfer charging roller.
6-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
B.
Bias control
The transfer charging roller bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). When a positive bias drive signal (TRPWM) is output from CPU, the positive
bias generation circuit comes into operation.
Also, when a negative bias signal (TRNFOT) is output, the negative bias generation
circuit comes into operation.
As mentioned before, 4 types of bias are applied to the transfer charging roller at
designated times.
Furthermore, the transfer bias to the transfer charging roller is switched, depending
on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent) of this unit.
By means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the CPU, the output voltage
from the positive bias generation circuit and negative bias generation circuit switches
over.
DC controller PCB
Fixed voltage
control
Photosensitive
+24V
drum
JH403
Superimpose
Positive bias
generation
circuit
Comparison
circuit
[1] TRPWM
Transfer charging roller
Bias switching
Negative
bias
generation
[1] TRPWM: Positive bias drive signal
[2] 1200DPI: Bias switching signal
[3] TRNFOT: Negative bias switching signal
[2] 1200DPI
CPU
(IC301)
[3] TRNFOT
Figure 6-301
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
6-5
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
IV. SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE ELIMINATOR BIAS
CONTROL
A.
Operation
The separation static charge eliminator is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301)
When a separation static charge eliminator bias ON signal (DCSON) is output from
the CPU, the drive circuit transformer T406 comes into operation and negative voltage is
applied to the separation static charge eliminator.
Also, when output voltage from the transformer T406 is returned to the bias drive circuit, the constant voltage control is performed in order to output a fixed voltage.
Furthermore, the separation static charge eliminator supply bias is switched depending on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent) of this unit,.
The bias drive circuit, by means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the
CPU, judges the print resolution and the switches the output voltage.
DC controller PCB
Photosensitive
+24V
drum
Separation static
charge eliminator
Drive circuit
(transformer
T406)
Bias control
circuit
[1] DSCON
CPU
(IC301)
Bias
switching
circuit
[1] DSCON: Static charge eliminator
bias ON signal
[2] 1200DPI: Bias switching signal
[2] 1200DPI
Figure 6-401
6-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL
A.
Outline
The circuit shown in Figure 6-501 is the circuit which controls the developing bias in
the DC controller PCB. It’s principal functions are as follows:
• Developing bias AC ON/OFF control
• Developing bias DC ON/OFF control
• Developing bias DC constant voltage control
B.
Operation
The developing bias control is performed by the DC ON/OFF signal (DVDUP) and
the AC ON/OFF signal (DVACON), which are output from the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC 301).
When DVDUP*=0 is output from the CPU, developing bias DC is applied by power
being supplied to the DC bias generation circuit,. And, when the DVACON signal is output from the CPU, AC bias is generated.
Due to the CPU outputting these signals at designated times, developing bias is generated and applied to the developing cylinder.
Furthermore the output voltage from the DC bias generation circuit undergoes constant voltage control by being returned to the comparison circuit.
DC controller PCB
JH402
Bias drive
circuit
Photosensitive
AC bias
generation
circuit
+24V
[1] DVACON
drum
Comparative circuit
DC bias
generation
circuit
[1] DVACON: AC bias drive signal
[2] DVDUP: DC ON/OFF signal
CPU
[2] DVDUP (IC301)
DC bias
detection circuit
Figure 6-501
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
6-7
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL
A.
Operation
The unit re-charges once again before fixing, in order to increase the transfer toner
adhesiveness, which has been weakened by the separation static charge.
The re-charge bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301).
When a re-charge bias ON signal (RECON) is output from the CPU with the prescribed timing, the drive circuit transformer T407 comes into operation and DC positive
bias is applied to the re-charge eliminator.
Also, when output voltage from the transformer T406 is returned to the bias control
circuit, constant voltage control occurs in order to output a fixed voltage.
Furthermore, the re-charge eliminator power supply bias is switched depending on
the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent).
The bias drive circuit, by means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the
CPU, judges the print resolution and the switches output voltage.
DC controller PCB
Re-charge eliminator
+24V
JH405
Drive circuit
(transformer
T407)
Bias control
circuit
Bias
switching
circuit
[1] RECON: Re-charge eliminator
bias ON signal
[2] 1200DPI: Bias switching signal
[1] RECON
CPU
(IC301)
[2] 1200DPI
Figure 6-601
6-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION
A.
Operation
The circuit for detecting whether or not there is a cartridge, and the volume of toner
in the cartridge, is shown in the diagram below.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) compares the developing bias AC (TNRCHKD)
which has been sent from the developing bias generation circuit and the output signal
(TNRCHKT) which has been output from the antenna inside the cartridge, and, judges
whether there is a toner cartridge, and also the level of toner in the cartridge.
When the developing bias is applied to the developing cylinder, the CPU checks the
difference between the 2 signals and judges whether there is a toner cartridge, and also
the level of toner in the cartridge.
Furthermore, the volume of remaining toner is regularly monitored when the developing bias is being applied, but the presence of the cartridge is only monitored when
developing bias is being applied during the initial rotation.
DC controller PCB
Developing
bias generation circuit
[1] TNRCHKD
CPU
(IC301)
Toner cartridge
Antenna
[2] TNRCHKT
output detection
circuit
[1] TNRCHKT: Developing bias AC output
[2] TNRCHK: Antenna output signal
Figure 6-701
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
6-9
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7
PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM
In this chapter, the operation, purpose and function of the unit’s paper feeding, from
pick-up to delivery, as well as the relationship between the electrical system and the
mechanical system is summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also
included.
This chapter contains illustrations of the main unit with an automatic document feeder installed.
Refer to the ADF service manual, which is included in this manual, for details regarding the construction of the automatic document feeder.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
OVERVIEW..............................................7-1
A. Construction Overveiw .......................7-1
PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION ...........7-2
A. Overveiw ............................................7-2
CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM........7-3
A. Pick-up oparation ...............................7-3
B. Retry pick-up ......................................7-5
C. Paper size detection ..........................7-6
MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP .......................7-7
A. Overview ............................................7-7
B. Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism ........7-8
C. Multi-feeder retry pick-up ...................7-9
D. Multi-feeder paper size setting .........7-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
V.
PAPER FEEDING OPERATION............7-12
A. Paper leading edge detection ..........7-12
B. Paper width detection ......................7-12
VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................7-13
A. Overview ..........................................7-13
B. Types of Jam ...................................7-14
C. Jam sequence..................................7-14
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................7-23
A. Cassette feeding assembly ..............7-24
B. Multi-feeder assembly ......................7-30
C. Registration roller assembly.............7-33
D. Feeder assembly .............................7-35
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW
A.
Construction Overview
The construction of the unit’s pick-up feeding system is illustrated in the diagram
below.
The pick-up feeding system rollers in the main unit are all driven by the main motor
(M601) via the gear and clutch.
■
Jam detection sensors
Symbol
PS301
PS302
Sensor name
Paper leading edge
sensor
Registration sensor
PS303
Paper sensor
PS306
Delivery sensor
Function
Detects the paper’s leading edge and controls the laser ON
timing.
Detects the timing to form a loop in the paper leading edge,
at the registration roller.
Detects the feeding condition of paper picked-up from the
cassette while it is in the vertical path assembly.
Detects the feeding condition of the delivery assembly’s paper.
Table 7-101
■
Paper sensor and size sensors
Symbol
PS305
PS501
PS304
Sensor name
Cassette paper
sensor
Multi-feeder paper
presence sensor
Paper width sensor
Function
Detects whether there is paper present in the cassette.
Detects whether there is paper present in the multi-feeder.
Detects the paper width. If paper is fed which is different in
width from the paper size set by the cassette paper size
lever, the feeding operation will stop.
Table 7-102
PS304
PS306
PS305
PS301
PS302
PS501
PS303
Figure 7-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-1
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
II. PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION
A.
Overview
The unit’s pick-up feeding system is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). The pick-up feeding system’s rollers are all driven by the main motor (M601) via
the gear and clutch.
The paper picked-up from the paper cassette and multi-feeder is fed to the registration roller unit by the vertical path roller, which is driven by the vertical path clutch
(CL301). The vertical path clutch (CL301) is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s vertical path clutch drive signal (CL301D). At this time the registration roller is not revolving,
therefore the paper stops moving and a loop formed at the leading edge, and any correction necessary is made to ensure the paper is not fed at a skew angle. At the designated time, the DC controller PCB (IC301) turns the registration clutch ON, and by the
main motor’s revolutions being transmitted to the registration roller, paper is fed and
passed through the transfer, separation and fixing/delivery assemblies to the delivery
tray.
[1] CL302D*: Registration clutch drive signal
[2] CL301D*: Vertical path roller clutch drive signal
[3] MMD*: Main motor drive signal
[1] CL302D*
CL301
J307-3
[2] CL301D*
DC controller PCB
J307-6
CL302
Main motor
[3] MMD*
M601
Figure 7-201
7-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
III. CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM
A.
Pick-up operation
The pick-up roller rotation is controlled by both the pick-up roller drive gear which
transmits the main motor’s (M601) drive to the pick-up drive axis gear, and the pick-up
solenoid (SL301).
The construction of the cassette pick-up assembly is illustrated in Figure 7-302.
When the main motor rotates, the connected drive relay gear also begins to rotate.
At this time, the cogless part of the feeding roller drive gear is in the drive relay gear
position, and the 2 gears are not engaged, therefore power is not transmitted to the
pick-up drive axis gear.
The pick-up solenoid ON signal (SL301D*) is output from the DC controller PCB,
and when the solenoid comes ON, the paper roller drive gear is released, and by the
push of the control arm the paper roller drive gear rotates a small amount.
When the feeding roller drive gear connected to this rotates, power is transmitted to
the pick-up drive axis gear, and the pick-up roller rotation begins.
When the pick-up roller has rotated once, the drive relay gear position and the cogless part of the feeder roller drive gear match, therefore the main motor’s drive is no
longer transmitted and the pick-up roller rotation stops.
The paper which has been picked-up is separated by the cassette’s separation tab
and separation roller, and then sent to the pick-up vertical path assembly. The pickup/feeding rollers are rotated by the main motor (M601) rotation which is transmitted via
the vertical path clutch (CL301), and paper is sent out to the registration roller assembly.
Registration sensor
Registration roller
Vertical path roller clutch
Registration clutch
Vertical path roller
Feeder roller
Pick-up sensor
Separation roller
Pick-up roller
Figure 7-301
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-3
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
The above diagram shows a
unit equipped with an ADF.
The construction of the main
unit is also the same for units
not equipped with the ADF.
Feed roller drive gear
Pick-up roller drive gear
Drive relay gear
Pick-up solenoid
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Gears are engaged
Solenoid ON
Rotation
Pick-up drive axis gear
The pick-up roller drive gear is at a standstill
due to the pick-up solenoid being OFF.
(Pick-up/feed rollers are not rotating)
The pick-up roller drive gear rotates due to
the pick-up solenoid being ON. Therefore
the pick-up drive gear rotates.
(Pick-up/feed rollers are rotating)
Figure 7-302
7-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
Retry pick-up
When paper is not picked-up even when the pick-up roller is rotating, the retry pickup operation occurs.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU counts the time from when the paper solenoid
(SL301) comes ON. If the pick-up sensor (PS303) cannot detect the paper’s leading
edge within a designated period of time, the pick-up solenoid comes ON again and the
pick-up operation is retried. Even when the retry pick-up is actuated once, if the pick-up
sensor does not detect the paper’s leading edge within the specified period of time, it
judges there is a jam, and a jam message is displayed on the control panel’s display.
Start signal
2nd sheet pick-up
Retry pick-up
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
3.0 sec.
Normal
3.0 sec. 3.0 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-303
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-5
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C.
Paper size detection
The size of the paper inside the cassette is monitored by the DC controller PCB’s
CPU. The CPU detects the change in position of the cassette paper size lever which is
set by the customer.
When the cassette is inserted into the main unit, the paper size lever presses the
main unit’s paper size switch and therefore the presence of paper in the cassette and
also the paper size is monitored.
The construction of the paper size switch is illustrated in the diagram below. The
paper size lever is comprised of 4 push switches which detect the paper size.
Paper size switch
sw404
sw403
sw401
sw402
Figure 7-304
SW401
SW402
SW403
SW404
A3
¡
¡
™
™
B4
¡
™
¡
™
A4
™
¡
™
™
A4R
™
¡
¡
™
B5
¡
™
™
™
B5R
¡
¡
¡
™
A5
™
™
¡
™
11 × 17 LGL
™
™
¡
¡
™
¡
¡
¡
LTR
¡
™
™
¡
LTRR
¡
™
¡
¡
¡: Push switch pressed
™: Push switch not pressed
Table 7-301
7-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
IV. MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP
A.
Overview
The multi-feeder is the mechanism which continuously picks-up paper stored in the
multi-feeder tray. The paper is picked-up from the top.
The paper in the tray is lifted up by the lifter plate and pressed down by the multi
feeder pick-up roller. The multi-feeder pick-up roller is driven by the main motor (M601),
via the solenoid and gear. The paper is fed one sheet at a time through the use of the
multi-feeder pick-up roller and separation pad to the registration roller. This series of
operations takes place for every pick-up.
The multi-feeder paper size is designated by the user in the control panel.
Main motor drive signal (MMD*)
DC controller PCB
M601
J307-1 Multi-feeder pick-up solenoid
drive signal (SL302D*)
SL302
Main motor
Multi-feeder
pick-up solenoid
J309-6 Multi-feeder paper signal (PS501S)
Paper
Multi-feeder paper
sensor (PS501)
Multi-feeder pick-up roller
Registration roller
J303-5 Registration sensor
paper signal (PS302S)
Lifter plate
Pre-Registration sensor
(PS302)
Separation pad
Figure 7-401
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-7
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
1.
Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism
Lifter plate operation
The mechanism for raising the lifting plate is illustrated in the diagram below.
During standby, the lifter plate is supported and lowered by the cams fitted onto the
front and rear of the multi-feeder pick-up roller.
When the paper roller rotates, the cams are also made to rotate, causing the lifter
plate to rise, and the paper set in the multi-feeder comes into contact with multi-feeder
pick-up roller.
A separation pad and sub pad are fitted onto the pick-up roller’s facing surface, and
through the separation process, only one sheet of paper is fed at a time to the main unit.
Lifter plate
in the lowered position
Cam
Lifter plate
in the raised position
Multi-feeder pick-up
roller drive axis
Separation
sub pad
Multi-feeder
pick-up roller
Cam
Separation pad
Separation
sub pad
Lifter plate push-up spring
Lifter plate
Figure 7-402
7-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
Multi-feeder pick-up drive mechanism
The multi-feeder pick-up roller is driven by the main motor, via the multi-feeder pickup drive assembly gear. The pick-up timing is controlled by multi-feeder pick-up solenoid
drive signal (SL302D), which is sent from the DC controller PCB.
The construction of the multi-feeder pick-up drive assembly is illustrated in Figure 7403.
When the main motor rotates, the pick-up drive relay gear rotates simultaneously.
When the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL302D*) is output from the DC
controller PCB, and the solenoid comes ON, the cogless gear is rotated slightly by the
spring tension. This causes the rotation to be transmitted to multi-feeder pick-up drive
gear, and the pick-up roller rotates.
When the pick-up roller has rotated once, the cogless gear’s cogless part, and the
pick-up drive relay gear position match, therefore drive is no longer transmitted to the
Multi-feeder drive axis gear and the pick-up roller rotation stops.
C.
Multi-feeder retry pick-up
When paper is not picked-up even when the multi-feeder pick-up roller is rotating,
retry pick-up operation occurs.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU counts the time from when the multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL301) comes ON. If the registration sensor (PS302) cannot detect the
paper’s leading edge within a designated period of time, the pick-up solenoid comes ON
again and the pick-up operation is retried. Even when the retry pick-up is actuated
again, if the pick-up sensor does not detect the paper’s leading edge within the specified
period of time, the retry operation is tried for a second time. If, during this second pickup retry paper does not arrive at the registration sensor, it judges there is a jam, and a
jam message is displayed on the control panel’s display.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-9
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
D.
Multi-feeder paper size setting
The multi-feeder paper size setting differs, depending on how the multi-feeder is
used.
a) When using the multi-feeder with a fixed paper size.
b) When resetting the size when replenishing the multi-feeders paper.
For a), designate the paper size by:
Registration/Setting key > 01 Data registration > 05 Printer settings > 06 Name stack
size “ON”.
If 06 Name stack size “OFF” is selected, the size needs to be set as for the above b).
In this case, set the paper size when setting paper in the multi-feeder.
In both cases a) and b), if the paper size setting and the size of the paper in the
multi-feeder are not the same, the “PAPER SIZE SETTING IS WRONG” message will
be displayed on the control panel.
In addition, the above methods a) and b) are the only 2 methods available when
printing fax reception data on multi-feeder pick-up paper.
7-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Multi-feeder pick-up roller
Pick-up drive
transmission
gear
Cogless gear
[1] The pick-up solenoid comes into operation,
the cogless gear lock is released.
Spring
[2] When the lock is released, the cogless gear
rotates a little due to the spring’s power.
[3]
[2]
[3] Drive from the motor is transmitted to the
cogless gear causing it to begin rotation.
[1]
Multi-feeder
pick-up solenoid
[4]
[5]
Cam
Control arm
[4] Due to the cogless gear cam pushing up the
control arm, the pick-up roller drive gear lock
is released.
Pick-up
drive transmission
gear
Pick-up drive
axis gear
[5] The pick-up roller drive gear rotates a small
amount, and the drive is transmitted from the
motor causing rotation to begin.
Figure 7-403
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-11
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
V. PAPER FEEDING OPERATION
A.
Paper leading edge detection
The paper sent from the pick-up assembly is sent to the transfer area by the registration clutch (CL302) rotation.
A sensor is installed in front of the transfer area which detects the leading edge of
the paper sent from the registration roller. The DC controller PCB sends a vertical synchronizing signal (TOP*) to the image processor PCB when the paper leading edge sensor (PS301) detects the paper’s leading edge.
A designated period of time after the image processor PCB receives the TOP* signal, it sends out a video signal (VDO*, VDO) which causes the image on the photosensitive drum and the paper’s leading edge to coincide.
After this, the paper passes through the transfer, separation and fixing areas, and is
then delivered onto the eject tray.
B.
Paper width detection
Paper width sensor (PS304)
[2] PS301S
Transfer charging roller
Paper leading edge sensor (PS301)
Registration roller
[1] PS304S: Paper width detection signal
[2] PS301S: Paper leading edge detection signal
[3] TOP*
DC controller PCB
[1] PS304S
[4] VDO
[4] VDO*
Image processor PCB
The unit’s cassette size detection is judged by the position of the cassette paper size
lever which the user has set in the unit.
In the event of the paper size (width) in the cassette and the setting of the paper size
lever differing from each other, the paper size sensor (PS304) detects this and a paper
width detection signal (PS304S) will be sent to the DC controller PCB which will stop the
feeding operation.
Due to this, even if smaller paper (widthwise) than set by the cassette size lever is
fed through, the toner developed on the photosensitive drum will not adhere to the edge
of the transfer charging roller, therefore internal machine soiling caused by the toner is
prevented.
[3] TOP*: Horizontal synchronized signal
[4] VDO/VDO*: Video signal
Figure 7-501
7-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
VI. JAM DETECTION
A.
Overview
The unit is equipped with 4 jam sensors to detect the condition of the paper feeding.
In addition, the unit is equipped with one sensor to detect paper presence in the
multi-feeder and one sensor to detect paper presence in the cassette.
In order to check the presence of paper and jams, the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301) checks at pre-programmed check timing intervals whether there is paper in the
sensor areas. When it is judged that a jam has occurred, the main motor is turned OFF,
and a jam message is displayed on the control panel.
Reference:
When a jam occurs during memory copying, the images saved in the memory are
completely erased, therefore it is necessary to copy the document again.
PS501
PS306
PS301
PS304
PS302
PS305
PS303
Figure 7-601
Symbol
PS301
PS302
PS303
PS304
PS305
PS306
PS501
Name
Paper leading edge sensor
Registration sensor
Pick-up sensor
Paper width sensor
Cassette paper sensor
Delivery sensor
Multi-feeder paper presence sensor
Signal name
PS301S
PS302S
PS303S
PS304S
PS305S
PS306S
PS501S
Jack number
J306-2
J303-2
J303-5
J306-5
J306-8
J308-5
J309-6
*1 Jack number on the DC controller PCB.
Table 7-601
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-13
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
Types of Jam
The DC controller PCB microprocessor (IC301) determines there is a jam in the following situations
a.
Delay jam
The copy paper has not arrived in the sensor area within a stipulated period of time
(not detected by the sensor).
b.
Stationary jam
The paper has not left the sensor within a stipulated period of time after the sensor
has detected the copy paper (the sensor has not turned OFF).
c.
Residual paper jam
When power is turned on paper is left behind in the sensor area (the sensor detects
copy paper).
C.
1.
Jam sequence
Pick-up delay jam
■
Detection by the pick-up sensor (PS303)
At the time of cassette pick-up, when paper has not arrived at the pick-up sensor
(PS303) within approx. 3 seconds after the pick-up solenoid (SL301) has been turned
ON, the retry operation will take place. If, during the retry pick-up operation the pick-up
sensor does not come ON within approx. 3 seconds after the pick-up solenoid comes
ON, it is judged there is a delay jam.
2nd sheet pick-up
Start signal
Retry pick-up
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
Pick up sensor
jam check
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
3.0 sec.
Normal
3.0 sec. 3.0 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-602
7-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
■
Detection by the registration sensor (PS302)
The conditions for detection by the registration sensor differ from the time of the first
sheet pick-up operation and the second and subsequent sheet pick-up in consecutive
paper feed.
a.
Delay jam at the time of the first sheet pick-up
When paper has not arrived at the registration sensor (PS302) within approx. 2.3
seconds after the pick-up sensor (PS303) has turned ON, it is judged that a delay jam
has occurred.
Start signal
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
2.3 sec.
Normal
Registration sensor
(PS302)
2.3 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-603
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-15
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
b.
Delay jam at the time of the second or subsequent sheet pick-up.
In this case there are 2 types of timing which monitor the feeding situation. Detection
and jam judgement is done by both these timings.
• A jam is determined at the same timing as the previously explained delay jam at
the time of the first sheet pick-up.
• Counting starts when the preceding sheet of paper has passed through the registration sensor (PS302), and if the leading edge of the next sheet of paper has not
arrived at the registration sensor (PS302) within approx. 2.0 seconds, it is judged
that a delay jam has occurred.
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
2.3 sec.
Normal
2.3 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-604
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
2.0 sec.
2.0 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-605
7-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
Pick-up delay jam (in the case of multi-feeder pick-up)
The pick-up from the multi-feeder is monitored by the registration sensor (PS302)
The timer count begins after the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid (SL302) has come
ON, or, in the case he second sheet during multiple sheet continuous pick-up, after the
paper sheet previously picked up has passed through the registration sensor. If paper
has not arrived at the registration sensor approx.1.5 seconds from the count beginning,
a retry pick-up takes place.
After the retry pick-up solenoid has turned ON, the timer count begins again, if paper
has not arrived at the registration sensor within approx.1.5 seconds, the retry pick-up
takes place once again. If paper has not arrived at the registration sensor within
approx.1.5 seconds after the second retry pick-up timer count begins, it is judged that a
delay jam has occurred.
Start Retry Retry
signal pickup pickup
Start signal
Multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL302)
Multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL302)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
jam check
1.5 sec.
Registration sensor
(PS302)
1.5 sec. 1.5 sec.1.5 sec.
Registration sensor
(PS302)
Normal
Main motor
(M601)
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Jam detection sequence for 1 sheet pick-up
Figure 7-606
Start signal
First sheet
Second
sheet
Retry
pick-up
Third Retry
sheet pick-up
Multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL302)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
1.5 sec.
Main motor
(M601)
1.5 sec.1.5 sec. 1.5 sec.
Abnormal
Jam detection sequence for multiple sheet pick-up
Figure 7-607
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-17
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3.
Registration sensor stationary jam (for cassette pick-up)
A registration sensor (PS302) stationary jam is only detected when continuous multiple sheet pick-up takes place.
At the time of the following sheet pick-up, the jam detection starts within approx. 3.0
seconds after the pick-up sensor (PS303) has turned ON (the following sheet leading
edge is in a position of approx. 10mm in front of the vertical path roller).
If approx. 2.5 seconds has passed, but the trailing edge of the preceding sheet has
not left the registration sensor (PS302), the registration sensor judges a delay jam has
occurred.
Start
signal
First sheet
Second sheet
Third sheet
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
0.3 sec.
0.3 sec.
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
2.5 sec.
Registration sensor
(PS302)
2.5 sec.
Normal
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-608
7-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4.
Registration sensor stationary jam (for multi-feeder pick-up)
In the case of multi-feeder pick-up, if, after the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid (SL302)
has come ON from the second or subsequent sheet pick-up, the preceding paper has
not left the registration sensor (PS302) after approx. 1.0, it is judged that a registration
sensor stationary jam has occurred.
Start
signal
First sheet
Second sheet
Third sheet
Multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL302)
1.0 sec.
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
1.0 sec.
Normal
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-609
5.
Paper leading edge sensor delay jam (for cassette pick-up)
If paper has not arrived at the leading edge sensor (PS301) approx. 1.2 seconds
after the registration clutch (CL302) has come ON, it is judged a paper leading edge
sensor jam has occurred.
Start signal
Registration clutch
(CL302)
Registration sensor
jam check
Paper leading edge
sensor (PS302)
1.2 sec.
1.2 sec.
Normal
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-610
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-19
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
6.
Paper leading edge sensor delay jam (for multi-feeder pick-up)
In the case of multi-feeder pick-up, if paper has not arrived at the leading edge sensor (PS301) after approx. 1.2 seconds after the registration clutch (CL302) has come
ON, a retry pick-up takes place. If paper has not arrived at the paper leading edge sensor approx. 1.2 seconds after the registration clutch operation for the retry pick-up has
come ON again, yet another retry takes place. If paper still does not arrive at the sensor
after the stipulated amount of time has passed, it is judged a paper leading edge sensor
delay jam has occurred.
Start signal
Retry pick-up
Retry pick-up
Registration clutch
(CL302)
Paper leading edge
sensor jam check
Paper leading edge
sensor (PS301)
1.2 sec.
1.2 sec.
1.2 sec.
1.2 sec.
Abnormal
Normal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-611
7.
Paper leading edge sensor stationary jam
If 6.7 seconds passes after paper has arrived at the leading edge sensor (PS301)
but has not passed through it, it is judged a paper leading edge sensor stationary jam
has occurred.
Start signal
Paper leading edge
sensor (PS301)
Paper leading edge
sensor jam check
6.7 sec.
Normal
6.7 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-612
7-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
8.
Delivery sensor delay jam
If the delivery sensor (PS306) does not come ON after 5 seconds has passed since
the paper leading edge sensor (PS301) has come ON, it is judged a delivery sensor
delay jam has occurred.
Start signal
Paper leading edge
sensor (PS301)
Delivery sensor
jam check
5.0 sec.
Delivery sensor
(PS***)
5.0 sec.
Normal
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-613
9.
Delivery sensor stationary jam
If paper has not passed through the delivery sensor (PS306) approx. 5 seconds after
the paper leading edge sensor (PS301) has come ON, it is judged there is a delivery
sensor stationary jam.
Start signal
Paper leading edge
sensor (PS301)
Delivery sensor
(PS306)
5.0 sec.
Delivery sensor
jam check
5.0 sec.
Normal
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-614
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-21
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
10. Fixer wraparound jam
It is judged there is a fixer wraparound jam if paper has wrapped around the fixer,
causing the delivery sensor to turn OFF within 1.4 seconds after the delivery sensor
(PS306) has detected the paper leading edge.
Start signal
Delivery sensor
(PS306)
Delivery sensor
jam check
1.4 sec.
Normal
1.4 sec.
Abnormal
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-615
11. Door open jam.
If, during pick-up/feeding the front cover is opened, a door open jam will be detected
and the feeding process immediately stopped.
Furthermore, if the pick-up vertical path assembly cover is opened during pickup/feeding, a jam message will be displayed on the control panel, indicating there is a
pick-up feeding malfunction.
12. Forced delivery operation
When the jams listed below occur during multiple copy printing, the sheet prior to the
one which caused the jam (preceding sheet) will be left inside the machine. Therefore
the main motor is forced to rotate causing the sheet to be delivered out of the machine.
Note: Even if residual paper is detected at the time of the power supply being turned
on to the unit, automatic delivery does not take place.
< Types of forced delivery jams >
• Pick-up sensor delay jam
• Pick-up delay jam *
• Paper leading edge sensor delay jam*
* Jams at the time of cassette pick-up and multi-feeder pick-up.
7-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main units metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-23
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
A.
1.
Cassette feeding assembly
To remove the pick-up roller
The pick-up roller’s attachment and
removal is easier when the printer unit is
removed from the main unit.
1) Rotate the pick-up roller’s axis [1],
unclip the roller collar tabs and
remove the pick-up roller [2].
[2]
roller collar tab
[1]
roller collar
tab
Figure 7-701
Reference:
The pick-up roller’s installation position is indicated in Figure 7-702
Installation location
Figure 7-702
7-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
To remove the Feeding / Separation
rollers
It is possible to attach and remove
the feeding / separation rollers even if the
printer unit is not removed from the main
unit.
1) Pull out and remove the main unit’s
cassette.
2) Slightly widen the lower right cover’s
front/rear suppor t assembly and
remove the lower right cover.
Caution:
Do not overly widen the suppor t
assembly.
[1]
Figure 7-703
3) Unclip the roller collar tabs [2] and
remove the feed roller [3] and separation roller [4]. The feed roller is
removed from the cassette insertion
opening and the separation roller is
removed from the lower right side.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Figure 7-704
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-25
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3.
To remove the pick-up unit
1) Remove the print unit from the main
unit (refer to 9-19).
2) Remove the main drive unit (refer to
9-22).
3) Remove the installation screw [1] and
tension spring [2], then remove the
front print unit pressure lever [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 7-705
4) Remove the E-ring [4], then remove
the drive relay gear [5].
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[6]
5) Remove the 4 installation screws [6]
and the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid
[7] connector. Then remove the multifeeder drive unit [8].
[6]
[5]
[6]
Figure 7-706
7-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
6) Remove the E-ring [9], then remove
the vertical path clutch [10] and the
registration roller clutch [11] (is it not
necessary to remove the clutch connectors).
[11]
[9]
[10]
[9]
Figure 7-707
7) Remove the connector [12] and relay
connector [13] from the DC controller
PCB (printer unit rear side). Remove
the disconnected cable from the cord
guide.
[13]
[12]
Figure 7-708
8) Remove the installation screw [14]
and remove the earth plate spring
[15].
[14]
[15]
9) Remove the installation screw [16],
and then remove the printer unit support roller [17].
10) Remove the tension spring from the
rear side printer unit pressure lever
[18], then slightly slide the pressure
lever together with the axis.
[17]
[18]
[16]
Figure 7-709
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-27
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
11) Remove the 5 installation screws
[19], and remove the pick-up unit.
[19]
Figure 7-710
4.
To remove the pick-up solenoid
1) Remove the 3 installation screws [1],
and then remove the pick-up drive
unit cover [2].
If the pressure lever roller [3] is
secured by tape, etc., before removing the drive unit cover, re-installation
of the drive unit cover will be made
easier.
[1]
2) Remove the installation screw and
then remove the pick-up solenoid.
[3]
[2]
Figure 7-711
7-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Construction of the pick-up assembly
pick-up roller axis
Registration sensor lever
Spring
Gear
Cogless gear
Pick-up solenoid
Pick-up drive unit cover
Figure 7-712
Construction of the pick-up roller drive gear (Front View)
When installing the gear, refer to the diagram below and confirm the gear’s positioning.
Pick-up roller drive relay gear (cogless gear)
Pick-up drive gear (cogless gear)
(Grey area)
Figure 7-713
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-29
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
1.
Multi-feeder assembly
To remove the multi-feeder pickup roller
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main unit ( refer to 9-19).
2) While pressing the tab, remove the
release lever [1]. Then remove the 3
installation screws [2] and remove
the drive unit cover [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-714
3) Remove the 3 installation screws [4],
then remove the right cover [5].
[4]
[5]
Caution:
Take care not to damage the multifeeder paper sensor lever.
Figure 7-715
7-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) Unclip the rear side tab [6], slide the
roller collar [7] and remove the multifeeder pick-up roller [8].
[7]
[8]
[6]
Figure 7-716
2.
To remove the separation pad
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main unit (Refer to 9-19).
2) Follow steps 3) to 5) of ‘3. To remove
the pick-up unit’, and remove the
multi-feeder drive unit.
3) Remove the 3 installation screws and
then remove the right cover.
4) Remove the 2 installation screws [1]
and the connector [2], then remove
the sensor PCB [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 7-717
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-31
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) Widen the tabs [4] and remove the
multi-feeder pick-up axis drive gear
[5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 7-718
6) Unclip the tab [7] on the multi-feeder
pick-up axis rear lifting plate pressure
cam [6] and slide the cam to the
inside.
[7]
[6]
Figure 7-719
7) Slide the multi-feeder pick-up axis to
the rear side and remove from the
bearing.
[8]
8) Open the lifting plate, rotate the separation pad [8] and remove.
Figure 7-720
7-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C.
Registration roller assembly
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main unit (refer to 9-19).
2) Remove the pick-up unit from the
printer unit (refer to 7-26).
3) Open the registration roller guide
plate [1], remove the 2 installation
screws, then remove the transfer
guide [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-721
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [4],
then remove the registration roller
unit.
[4]
[4]
Figure 7-722
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-33
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Construction of the registration roller assembly
Lower registration guide plate
Upper registration
guide plate
Registration pressure roller
Registration roller
Figure 7-723
7-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
D.
1.
Feeder assembly
To remove the feeder assembly
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main unit (refer to 9-19)
2) Remove the DC controller PCB (refer
to 9-25)
3) Follow steps 3) to 5) of ‘To remove
the main motor’ and remove the main
drive assembly.
4) Remove the transfer charging roller.
5) Remove the fixing assembly (refer to
8-7).
6) Remove the 2 installation screws [1]
and then remove the feeder assembly.
[1]
Figure 7-724
Caution:
Install the feeder unit before installing
the DC controller PCB. If the feeder
unit is installed after the DC controller
PCB, there is the possibility that the
high-voltage contact pins will become
deformed.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
7-35
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 8
FIXING SYSTEM
In this chapter, the basic operation, purpose and function of the fixing system, as
well as the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system is
summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I.
II.
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ...................8-1
A. Overview ............................................8-1
B. Fixing pressure roller cleaning ...........8-1
FIXING CONTROL...................................8-3
A. Fixing temperature control .................8-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
III.
B. Fixing heater safety mechanism ........8-5
C. Fixing assembly malfunction
detector ..............................................8-5
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................8-6
A. Removing the fixing assembly ...........8-7
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
I. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
A.
Overview
The main motor drives both the fixing assembly’s pressure roller and the delivery
roller. The paper, which has separated from the photosensitive drum, is then fed into the
fixing assembly by means of the feeder belt. After the toner has been fixed to the paper
by the fixing film and the pressure roller, it is fed out of the machine.
The paper, which is fed out of the fixing assembly is detected by the delivery sensor
(PS306).
B.
Fixing pressure roller cleaning
Occasionally, problems such as smudges or blotches appear on the reverse side of
the paper due to toner which has adhered to the fixing pressure roller. In order to eliminate these types of problems, this unit is equipped with a cleaning roller mechanism,
which cleans the fixing pressure roller.
Figure 8-101 illustrates this mechanism’s construction. The cleaning roller comes
into contact with the fixing pressure roller. Rotation of the fixing pressure roller causes
the cleaning roller to also rotate, and any clumps of toner which may have adhered to
the surface of the pressure roller are thereby removed.
The fixing pressure rolling cleaning only takes place when the fixing pressure roller
is rotating, and the cleaning mechanism only works during printing when the pressure
roller is rotating.
Also, when the unit’s print counter reaches 500 sheets, the rotation time is elongated. After every five hundredth copy, the length of time the pressure roller rotates is
extended. Consequently, a more thorough cleaning of the fixing pressure roller is
achieved, increasing the overall effectiveness of the cleaning process.
Fixing film
Delivery roller
Fixing heater
Fixing assembly inlet guide
Cleaning roller
Pressure roller
Figure 8-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
8-1
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
Heater drive (FSRDRV)
Main
motor
Delivery signal (PS306S)
Motor drive signal (MMD)
DC controller PCB
DC Power supply
PCB
M601
Delivery
sensor
(PS306)
Fixing heater
Delivery roller
Pressure roller
Cleaning roller
Figure 8-102
8-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
II. FIXING CONTROL
A.
1.
Fixing temperature control
Overview
This unit’s fixing heater uses two surface heaters, which are installed into one
ceramic base. The heater heats up the fixing film.
The two surface heaters are equipped with ON/OFF switches, which keep the power
consumption low.
The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by a thermistor (TH1), which is
located on top of the fixing heater. The DC controller PCB CPU (IC301), based on the
fixing heater surface temperature signals, turns ON or OFF the fixing heater drive 1 signal (FSRDRV1) and the fixing heater drive 2 signal (FSRDRV2). This controls the fixing
heater’s surface temperature so it reaches the stipulated temperature.
During printing, the heater surface temperature setting is based on the following five
conditions:
• When the fixing assembly is warming up, the temperature detects the initial temperature.
• Printing interval (first copy, intermittent copying, multiple copying)
• Paper size
• Resolution (600dpi, 1200dpi)
• Paper type, as selected in the user mode
Paper type selection Resolution
in user mode*1
(dpi)
Target temperature (˚C)
Print temperature
control
Page interval
temperature control
600
175 to 145
190 to 175
170 to 155
1200
155 to 125
175 to 160
600
160 to 130
Plain paper
Special paper
150
to
140
140 to 110
1200
145 to 115
160 to 145
600
Tracing paper
130 to 100
137
to
127
1200
*1: USER MODE > 05 PRINTER SETTING > 10 SELECT PAPER
Bond paper
Table 8-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
8-3
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
Reference:
When the amount of time which has lapsed between the delivery sensor (PS306)
detecting the end of one paper, and the next paper passing the through the paper
leading edge sensor (PS301) is less than one second, the temperature control
changes to the paper interval temperature control.
When compared to printing at 1200dpi equivalent, the feeding speed when printing at
600dpi is doubled, and so the fixing target temperature is high. A sudden rise in temperature of the fixing heater end may occur if small-sized paper is used when printing
at 600dpi. In order to prevent this, the throughput is decreased by control of the fixing
assemblys temperature.
DC controller PCB
DC power supply PCB
Fuse (F2)
J201-4
J201-
J305-37
J305-39
J201-
J305-40
Zero cross
detector circuit
FSRDRV1
1
FSRDRV2
2
/ZEROX 19
+24VA
Fuse (F1)
+5V
Fixing heater safety circuit
Q4
Relay
(R1)
+5V
J201-
RLYD
J305-
IC301
CPU
+5V
+5V
IC304
- 2
1
+
3
J203-2
/PRNT
FSRH2
FSRN
FSRH1
+5V
RLYDRV 100
+5V
J102-1
J102-3
Thermistor
J102-5
Fixing film
unit
FSRTH
J203-1
Thermoswitch
IC304
- 6
7
+
5
FSRTM
+5V
Q301
Pressure
roller
Fixing
heater
Delivery
roller
M601 Main
J201-
25
THCHG 43
J305-4
FSRTH
motor
Figure 8-201
8-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
B.
Fixing heater safety mechanism
This unit is equipped with a fixing heater safety circuit, located inside the DC controller PCB, which monitors the fixing temperature for abnormal rises in temperature.
Should an abnormality occur, the output from the main circuit will switch the relay (RL1),
located on the power supply PCB, to the OFF position, which cuts off the power supply
to the fixing heater.
When, due to rises in the temperature of the fixing heater, the power voltage of the
thermistor reaches 0.8V or higher (230 °C or higher), the output of the number 7 pin of
the comparator (IC304) changes to “L”. When this happens, the number 1 pin of the
IC304 changes to “L”, the Q4 changes to OFF, which causes the relay (RL1) to switch
OFF.
Furthermore, the fixing assembly has been equipped with a thermoswitch (TSW1).
Should the surface temperature of the thermoswitch reach approximately 240 °C, the
thermoswitch switches OFF, and the power supply to the fixing heater is cut off.
C.
Fixing assembly malfunction detector
Should the CPU (IC301) of the DC control PCB detect any of the conditions from ‘a’
to ‘h’, described below, it judges the fixing heater is malfunctioning and the error message (# # 322) is displayed on the operation panel.
a. When 10 seconds have passed since the initial rotation began, and the thermistor’s
temperature is below 100°C.
b. When 50 seconds have passed since the initial rotation began, and the thermistor’s
temperature is 10°C or more below the target temperature.
c. When the fixing heater is switched on, and the temperature doesn’t rise over 15°C in
less than 0.75 seconds.
d. When the thermistor’s temperature is less than 75°C during the print temperature
control.
e. When the fixing heater’s temperature is 21 degrees or more higher than the target
temperature for 30 continuous seconds.
f. When the fixing heater’s temperature rises to 221°C or over.
g. When there was no detection of the zero cross signal (temperature control reference
signal) after turning on the power of the main unit.
h. When there was no detection of the zero cross signal while the heater was ON for 3
or more continuous seconds.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
8-5
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
8-6
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
A.
Removing the fixing
assembly
1) Remove the two screws, and take off
the lower left cover.
[1]
2) Open the front cover, remove the 5
screws [1], and then remove the
delivery assembly cover.
When removing the delivery assembly cover, please place your hands in
the positions shown in the diagram
on the right, and then lift the cover
up.
Place your hands here to lift.
Figure 8-301
Note:
On the top of the delivery assembly
cover, inside the area marked ▲ ,
there is a tab. When the cover is lifted
up, the tab is disconnected from the
catch.
When replacing the cover, be sure to
place the cover tab correctly in the “U”
guide.
Be sure to insert correctly.
Figure 8-302
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
8-7
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM
3) Remove the two screws [2], and
remove the grounding cable.
[3]
[2]
[3]
4) Remove the two screws [3], and
remove the fixing assembly.
Figure 8-303
8-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9
EXTERNAL / AUXILIARY MECHANISM
In this chapter, the operation, function and purpose of this unit’s auxiliary control system as well as the relation between the electrical system and mechanical system is
explained. Furthermore, an overview of each part’s operation timing is explained.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
CONTROL PANEL...................................9-1
A. Overview ............................................9-1
POWER SUPPLY ....................................9-2
A. Low-voltage power supply circuit .......9-2
B. High voltage power supply circuit ......9-4
C. Energy save function control..............9-5
FAN ..........................................................9-7
A. Rotation control mechanism ..............9-7
BACK-UP BATTERY................................9-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
V.
A. Back-up function ................................9-8
B. Back-up Data ...................................9-12
DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................9-16
A. Control panel....................................9-17
B. Main Motor .......................................9-19
C. DC controller PCB............................9-25
D. Image processor PCB ......................9-26
E. DC power supply PCB .....................9-27
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
I. CONTROL PANEL
A.
Overview
The structure of the control panel is displayed in the diagram below.
The control panel interface uses a single-line two-way serial interface.
The control panel is made up of two boards, and is controlled by the image processor PCB (IC15).
The liquid crystal display console is composed of 80 × 320dots.
Image processor
PCB
Control panel
PCB 1
Control panel
PCB 2
Control
panel
CPU
Key SW
Key SW
Slide SW
IC15
LED
VR
LCD
VR
Figure 9-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-1
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
II. POWER SUPPLY
A.
1.
Low-voltage power supply circuit
Low-voltage power supply circuit
The DC power supply of the main unit is generated by the DC power supply PCB.
The DC power supply PCB converts the input AC power supply into DC+24V,
DC+12V, DC-12V, and DC+5V, and supplies each of the internal electrical loads.
An overview of the DC power supply is shown in the table below.
Output voltage name
+5V1 and +5V2
+12V
-12V
+24V1 and +24V2
Output voltage value
+5.1V ± 3%
+12.0V ± 5%
-12.0V ± 5%
+24.0V ± 5%
Table 9-201
Ratings for the fuses installed on the DC power supply PCB
Electrical symbol
F1
F2
F3
F4
Rating
15A 125V
15A 125V
5A 125V
5A 125V
Table 9-202
9-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
Fixing heater
RL1
Fuse 1
Fuse 2
5V generation
Front cover Main switch
open/close
switch
DC controller PCB
5V
Noise filter
24V
12V generation
5V
12V
24V
24V generation
DC+5V1
DC+24V2
Cassette feeder
and electrical
load
Image processor PCB
DC+5V1
DC+12V
DC-12V
DC+24V1
Control panel
Automatic
document feeder
and electrical loads
CCD PCB
5V
24V
Noise filter
12V
Abnormality
detection printed
circuit
24V
12V
5V
DC power supply PCB
DC+5V1
DC+12V
Electrical loads
Accessory function PCB
DC+5V1
DC+5V2
DC+12V
DC+24V1
DC+24V2
Figure 9-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-3
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
2.
Protection function
There is an overcurrent / overvoltage protective function located on the DC power
supply PCB, which automatically interrupts the output voltage. This is to protect the DC
power supply circuit from damage which may occur from problems such as a short in
the electrical load, which can cause an overcurrent or overvoltage.
When the overcurrent / overvoltage protective function is activated, turn off the
power supply switch, and once the electrical load trouble has been rectified, turn the
power switch on again to restart.
Also, there are two fuses which have been built into the internal circuit. Should an
overcurrent occur in the AC line, the fuses blow, and the flow of electricity is cut off.
B.
High voltage power supply circuit
The high voltage power supply circuit is built into the DC controller PCB.
At designated times, the DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) emits instructions to generate the high voltages listed below.
• Primary charge roller applied voltage (AC voltage + DC positive voltage)
• Developing bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
• Transfer charge applied (DC positive voltage as well as DE negative voltage)
• Static charge eliminator bias (DC negative voltage)
Please refer to chapter 6 “Image formation system” for more information regarding
the control of each electrical load.
9-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
C.
1.
Energy save function control
Overview
This unit is equipped with an Energy Save function (referred to hereafter as ESS),
which serves to reduce the energy consumption while the unit is in standby mode.
When the main unit has been in stand-by mode for the specified length of time, it
switches over to the ESS function.
The settings for the activation times of the ESS function and the settings for the
stand-by time can be registered in the user mode.
Stand-by time: from 3 to 30 minutes (factory setting: 3 minutes)
2.
Control
The ESS is controlled by the image processor PCB.
The main unit stays in the stand-by mode until the ESS activation time specified in
the user mode has elapsed. Then, the ESS control signal is emitted by the ESS controller assembly, which is located on the image processor PCB.
The DC controller PCB, the control panel and the electrical loads are controlled by
this signal.
■
Power consumption during stand-by mode
Normal stand-by mode:
20W ± 10%
When the ESS is activated: approximately 14W
DC power supply PCB
DC power supply
Image
processor
PCB
ESS
controller
assembly
ESS
control signal
DC power supply
DC
controller
PCB
DC power
supply
ESS
controller signal
ADF relay
PCB
DC power
supply
Cassette feeder
and
each electrical
load
DC power
supply
Electrical loads
DC power
supply
IC
IC
IC
IC
ESS
controller signal
Control
panel
Figure 9-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-5
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
3.
Operation
When the ESS function is activated, all of the LED lights on the main unit’s control
panel, except the Energy Saver Key, are extinguished.
If any of the conditions listed below exist, then the ESS mode is not activated.
• The Energy Save mode has not been registered in the user mode.
• When the paper-out light, the jam light, the toner-out light, a service error or other
error lights are on.
• When there are image data stored in the image memory.
• When there is a document in the ADF.
To turn off the ESS mode, press the Energy Saver Key. If any of the situations below
occur, the unit will automatically turn off the ESS mode.
• A document is placed in the ADF.
• A fax is received (for those machines fitted with the fax function).
• The phone is taken off the hook (for those machines fitted with the fax function).
• The pre-set report output time has arrived (for those machines fitted with the fax
function).
• The pre-set timer alarm time has arrived (for those machines fitted with the fax
function).
9-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
III. FAN
A.
Rotation control mechanism
This unit has been equipped with an exhaust fan motor (FM301), located at the rear
of the printer assembly. The fan motor Hall element has a built-in 2 phase 4 pole DC
brushless motor, and is integrated with the motor drive circuit.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) controls the rotation of the fan motor.
When the power switch of the main unit is turned ON, the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301) sends out the half-speed rotation signal (HALFFAM*) “0”. This activates the fan
motor at half-speed rotation.
When the main unit starts printing, once the fixing assembly’s temperature has
reached the target temperature (160ÞC), the CPU (IC301) sends out the half-speed
rotation signal (HALFFAM*) “1”. This activates the fan motor drive signal (FAMON),
which in turn raises the electrical voltage to the full speed levels, and full speed rotation
of the fan begins.
The fan continues at full speed rotation until printing is finished. Then, the main
motor (M601) stops and it powers down to half-speed 30 seconds after the printing
operation is completed.
Should there be a problem with the CPU (IC301) for any reason, and the fan motor
does not rotate according to the set timings, the fan motor lock detector signal (FAMLOCK) detects this, and outputs an error code (##0325).
DC controller PCB
+24V
Half-speed
rotation signal
(HALFFM*)
Drive circuit
J308-8
FM301
Fan motor drive signal
(FMON)
CPU
(IC301)
Fan motor lock detection signal
(FMLOCK)
J308-7
J308-6
Figure 9-301
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-7
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
IV. BACK-UP BATTERY
A.
1.
Back-up function
Overview
Should there be a power failure, or should the power supply switch be turned off, the
image processor PCB of the main unit has been equipped with a data back-up lithium
battery (BAT2) and a vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1), which are part of the
data back-up function. For more information about the types of data which can be
backed up, please refer to page 9-12.
Caution:
The lithium battery and the vanadium lithium secondary battery are made up of lithium and organic solvents, which are extremely combustible materials. Should these
batteries be put in a fire, an explosion or very intense fire may occur. Also, the liquids
inside the batteries may damage the skin. For these reasons, please handle these
batteries with sufficient care.
When the batteries have been completely used up dispose of them in an appropriate
manner (dispose them separately from normal garbage).
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery (BAT1)
Image processor PCB
Lithium battery
(BAT2)
Figure 9-401
9-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
2.
Vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1)
• Types of data this battery backs up: Image data (data of fax transmission and
receiving).
• IC which this battery backs up: DRAM on the image processor PCB (IC7, IC8, IC9,
IC10).
• Amount of back-up time: approximately 3 hours (in an environment subject to normal temperatures and normal atmospheric pressure, where the power switch of
the main unit has been ON continuously for one day or more).
• Effective life of the battery: approximately 5 years, or until the battery has been
100% discharged 40 times).
The BAT1 of the main unit cannot be replaced as a single unit. For this reason, when
the battery dies, it is necessary to replace the image processor PCB.
The data this battery protects are the image data from transmitting and receiving
faxes. It does not store the image data from the usage of the memory copy function.
Caution:
Should the length of time noted above as “amount of back-up time” be exceeded, the
backed up data will be erased.
In addition, the image data will also be erased should the jumper plug (JP1), located
on the image processor PCB, be removed. In order to avoid this, when servicing the
unit, please print out the data stored in the memory prior to commencing servicing
operations.
■
How to print:
• Printing transmission image data:
Memory Reference > Print document > Select document to print > Print.
• Transfer Printing received image data:
In case the machine malfunctions and cannot print, this machine is equipped with
a function which allows the transfer of received image data to another fax machine
for printing.
Memory Reference > Transmit document > Select document to transfer >
Designate transfer destination > Select sender’s name > Transfer.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-9
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
Reference:
1. A DRAM check will erase all the image data; therefore, prior to performing a
DRAM check, please be sure to print the image data. To perform a check on the
DRAM, press: SERVICE MODE>TEST MODE>1:DRAM.
2. If a memory clear report automatically prints out when the power switch of the
main unit is turned on, the data on the list are the image data the unit was unable
to save, and which were deleted.
After this list is printed, the system automatically deletes the stored management
information. An example of a memory clear report is displayed below in diagram 9401.
Figure 9-401
3.
Lithium battery (BAT2)
• Types of data this battery backs up: Control data (User data, activity management
data, service mode settings content, etc.)
• IC which this battery backs up: image processor PCB (IC36, IC37).
• Effective life of the battery: approximately 5 years.
When the lithium battery (BAT2) dies the message “DATA ERROR” is displayed on
the display panel when the power switch is turned on. When this occurs, please change
the lithium battery. In this situation, the information stored in the control memory has
been erased, and so printing out is not possible.
After the lithium battery has been changed, and the power switch on the main unit is
turned on again, the message “Data have been destroyed” is displayed on the display
panel again. Please press the set key on the control panel. The data stored in the control memory will be reset to the factory settings. The unit will go into stand-by mode.
9-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
4.
Jumper plugs
The image processor PCB has been equipped with a jumper plug. This acts to prevent the depletion of the back up batteries.
The function of the jumper plug (JP1) is to help prevent the consumption of the batteries. Service parts processor PCB’s come with jumper plug (JP1), set to the OFF position, and without jumper plug (JP3). Consequently, when the image processor PCB
needs to be replaced, please set the JP1 to the ON position. When the JP3 is being
replaced, it is necessary to remove it from the board prior to replacement, and mount it
on the new board.
When the above operation is performed, and the power supply of the main unit is
switched back on, the message “PRESS SET KEY” appears on the display. Please
press the set key found on the control panel, which will re-set the SRAM (IC36, IC37) to
the factory settings. The unit will go into stand-by mode. The control data can be reentered at this point.
Caution:
The function of the vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1) is to back up transmitted and received faxed image data. Accordingly, if the main unit has not been
equipped with a fax function, it is not necessary to change the JP1 to the ON position.
Should a fax be added to the main unit as an accessory, the JP1 must be changed to
Jumper plug (JP1)
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery
(BAT1)
Image processor PCB
Jumper plug (JP3)
Lithium battery
(BAT2)
Figure 9-403
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-11
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
B.
1.
Back-up Data
Data types
The table below lists the types of data that each back-up lithium battery (BAT1,
BAT2) stores. These batteries are located on the image controller PCB.
The lithium battery BAT2 backs up the a), b), and c) types of data stored in the control memory, while the vanadium lithium secondary battery BAT2 backs up the data d)
stored in the image memory.
a) User data
Item
Registration/Setting
Details
1. Data registration
(Reception/transmission
mode settings)
2. Telephone number registration (One-touch dial, etc)
Table 9-401
b) Service mode data
Item
#1.
#2.
#3.
#4A.
#4B.
#4C.
#5.
#6.
#7.
#8.
#9.
#10.
SSSW
MENU
NUMERIC Param
SPECIAL
NCU
ISDN
TYPE
SCANNER
PRINTER
CLEAR
ROM
CS SET
Details
Error management, echo countermeasures etc.
NL equalizer, sending level, etc.
T1 Timer setting, etc.
Normally not operated
Normally not operated
Normally not operated
Normally not operated
Normally not operated
Reduction / cassette selection settings, etc.
Scan count, print counter, etc.
Version number, checksum, etc.
Revert to initial mirror mount settings.
Table 9-402
9-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
c) Management data
These are automatically stored data regarding the main unit’s operating conditions.
Item
Details
Activity management record Record of the past 40 transmissions
System dump record
Past communication conditions, error communication history, etc.
Table 9-403
d) Data backed up by BAT1
Item
Transmission image
Reception image
Details
Transmission (memory transmission, report transmission)
Delayed communications
Delayed broadcast transmission
Polling transmission
Relay broadcast transmission
Confidential reception
Memory reception
Table 9-404
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-13
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
2.
Printing the back-up information list
It is possible to print out an information list of the data backed up by the batteries in
the control memory.
When changing the image processor PCB or the lithium battery, or while the power
switch is off, when removing the jumper plug (JP3) located on the image processor
PCB, please make sure to print out the following lists prior to removing the jumper plug.
a) User data list
Item
Registration mode
Dial registration mode
List name
User data list
1-touch dial telephone number list 1
Coded speed-dial telephone number list 1
Group dial telephone number list 1
1-touch dial telephone number list 2
Coded speed-dial telephone number list 2
Table 9-405
b) Service Mode data list
Item
Service mode data
List name
System data list
Table 9-406
c) Management data
Item
Activity management records
System dump records
List name
Activity management report
System dump list
Table 9-407
9-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
■
Back-up battery function table
Type
Back-up IC
Battery life
Individual battery
replacement
Operation JP plug
Back-up data
Back-up data information print
BAT1
Vanadium lithium secondary
battery
DRAM (IC7,IC8,IC9,IC10, and
8MB increased memory DRAM)
Approximately 5 years, or until
the battery has been 100% discharged 40 times
Not possible
BAT2
Lithium battery
JP1 (in operation when in the
ON position)
• Transmission image data
(Memory transmission, broadcast transmission, delayed
transmission, delayed report,
polling transmission, relay
broadcast transmission)
• Reception image data
(Confidential reception, memory reception)
• Transmitted image print using
the Memory Reference function, and received image transfer print.
JP3
SRAM (IC36, IC37)
Approximately 5 years
Possible
• User data (User mode registration)
• Telephone number registration
• Service mode registration
• Management data (communications management registration, system dump registration)
• User data list
• One-touch dial telephone number lists 1 and 2
• Speed-dial telephone number
lists 1 and 2
• Group dial telephone number
list 1
• System data list
• Activity management report
• System dump list
Table 9-408
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-15
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This section describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
9-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
A.
Control panel
1) Remove the 2 installation screws
from the left and the right sides, and
remove the front upper cover [1].
[1]
2) Remove the 2 installation screws
from the left and the right sides, and
remove the control panel lower cover
[2].
[2]
Figure 9-501
3) Remove the 6 installation screws [3]
from the left and right sides (two are
attached to the grounding cable).
[3]
Figure 9-502
[3]
Figure 9-503
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-17
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
4) Move the control panel forward,
remove the 2 connectors [4], and
remove the control panel.
[4]
Figure 9-504
9-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
B.
1.
Main Motor
Removing the printer unit
1) Pull out the cassette on the main
unit, and open the front cover.
2) Remove the cartridge.
3) Remove the 2 installation screws and
remove the lower left cartridge.
4) Remove the 5 installation screws [1],
and remove the delivery cover. Place
your hands as indicated in the diagram, and lift it up a little to remove it.
[1]
Handles
Figure 9-505
Caution:
On the upper portion of the delivery
cover, inside the part marked ▲, there
is a tab for connecting. When the
cover is raised, the tab is released
from the catch.
When putting the cover on, while
ensuring that you have placed the tab
correctly in the ‘U’ guide, re-fit the
cover to the unit.
Insert correctly
Figure 9-506
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-19
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
5) Remove the 2 installation screws [2]
on the fixing assembly, and remove
the grounding cable [3].
[2]
[3]
6) Remove the 5 connectors [4], which
are attached to the DC controller
PCB.
7) Remove the stop ring, and remove
the cord guide [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 9-507
8) Remove the installation screw [6],
and remove the car tridge drive
release plate [7].
[6]
[7]
9) While gripping the release lever [8],
slowly pull out the printer unit.
10) Place your hand in the cassette
insertion inlet, and while pushing on
the upper por tion of the release
catch, slowly pull out the printer unit.
Once the unit has come out far
enough, place your hands on the
front part and the rear side, and continue to remove the printer unit while
supporting it.
Catch Push
Lower side of the main unit
(Upper portion of the recording
paper insertion inlet)
[8]
Figure 9-508
Caution:
If the printer unit is pulled out too
quickly, there is a chance that it may
fall out, so please be sure to pull it out
slowly.
9-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
2.
Cautionary points relating to the
removal and insertion the printer
unit
■ When lifting the printer unit, please
place your hands in the positions indicated in the diagram.
Printer unit
Figure 9-509
■ When removing and inserting the printer unit, please be sure not to bend the
main unit’s sheet metal plate which is
indicated in the diagram. This is the
primary cause of problems during
removal and insertion of the cassette.
Be careful not to bend during removal
and attachment of the printer unit
Figure 9-510
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-21
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
■ When setting the printer unit into the
main body, ensure that the ↑ ↓ marks
on the seals located on the front and
rear portions of the main unit rail line
up with the positions of the yellow
rollers located on the front and rear
portions of the left edge of the printer
unit.
Seals
Yellow rollers
Figure 9-511
9-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
3.
Removing the main motor
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main unit (see page 9-19 for further
information).
2) While pressing the tab, remove the
release lever [1].
[3]
[1]
3) Remove the 3 installation screws [2],
and remove the drive assembly cover
[3].
[2]
Figure 9-512
4) Remove the connector [4] from the
main motor driver PCB.
[4]
[6]
5) Remove the 5 installation screws [5]
and remove the main drive assembly
[6].
[5]
Figure 9-513
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-23
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
6) Remove the 3 installation screws [7],
and remove the main motor [8] from
the driver PCB.
[7]
[8]
[7]
Figure 9-514
Reference:
The structure of the main drive unit is depicted below.
Main motor
Figure 9-515
9-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
C.
DC controller PCB
1) Remove the printer unit from the
main body (see page 9-19 for further
information).
2) Stand the printer unit in the same
way as depicted in Figure 9-516.
Caution:
■ When standing the printer unit on a
desk or other furniture, please be
careful not to scratch the surface of
the furniture.
■ Also, before performing this step,
please spread out newspapers, etc.
to ensure the right side of the printer unit’s exter nal cover is not
scratched.
■ Do not perform this operation on an
unstable surface. Stand the printer
unit on a horizontal surface, and
make sure that it cannot topple
over. Make sure to remove the cartridge prior to standing the printer
unit up.
Figure 9-516
3) Remove all connectors which are
attached to the DC controller PCB.
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [1].
Slide
5) Slide the DC controller PCB together
with the support plate upwards. Then,
pull it out towards the front.
[1]
[1]
Figure 9-517
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-25
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
D.
1.
Image processor PCB
Removing the ROM DIMM
1) Remove the installation 4 screws,
and remove the main unit’s back
cover.
[2]
[1]
2) Spread the upper and lower tabs [2]
of the ROM DIMM [1], and remove
the ROM DIMM.
Caution:
When removing the ROM DIMM, if it is
pressed down too strongly, it may
cause damage to the mount, so perform this operation carefully.
[2]
Figure 9-518
2.
Removing the image processor
PCB
1) Remove the 4 installation screws and
remove the main unit’s back cover.
[1]
2) Remove the 7 connectors which are
attached to the image processor PCB
and remove the 2 flat cables.
3) Remove the 4 installation screws [1],
and remove the image processor
PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 9-519
9-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
E.
DC power supply PCB
1) Remove the 4 installation screws,
and remove the main unit’s back
cover.
4) Remove the 5 installation connectors
which are attached to the DC power
supply PCB.
[1]
5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and
remove the DC power supply PCB.
[1]
Figure 9-520
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
9-27
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10
CASSETTE FEEDER
In this chapter, the cassette feeder’s basic operation, purpose and function, as well
as the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system is summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
In this manual, the accessory one level cassette feeder unit D1 and the accessory
three level cassette feeder unit E1 are called the cassette feeders.
The units depicted in the diagrams in this chapter have all been fitted with the automatic document feeder. For more information regarding the automatic document feeder,
please refer to the ADF service manual included in this manual.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
OVERVIEW............................................10-1
OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITS ..............................................10-3
A. Overview ..........................................10-3
FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB
INPUT AND OUTPUT .............................10-4
OPERATION OVERVIEW......................10-5
A. Overview ..........................................10-5
B. Basic Sequence ..............................10-6
FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL................10-7
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Operation .........................................10-7
JAM DETECTION ..................................10-8
A. Overview ..........................................10-8
B. Jam Sensing ....................................10-9
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..............10-11
A. Removing the feeder motor ...........10-12
B. Removing the pick-up/feeder/
separation motor ............................10-12
C. Removing the pick-up unit .............10-14
VI.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
I. OVERVIEW
The cassette feeder structure is displayed in the diagrams below.
The unit may be equipped with a one level cassette feeder or with a three level cassette feeder unit.
The structure of each cassette feeder is the same, and each cassette feeder is
equipped with a pick-up assembly and a feeder controller PCB, which controls the operation of the pick-up assembly.
Reference:
If the cassette feeder has two levels, or four levels or more, a control malfunction will
occur in the main unit.
Feeder controller
PCB
Cassette
feeder
Paper flow
Cassette feeder one level type
Figure 10-101
Feeder controller
PCB
Paper flow
Cassette
feeders
Cassette feeder three level type
Figure 10-102
The units depicted above are fitted with an ADF. Those units not equipped with an
ADF are the same.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-1
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
Reference:
With the three level cassette feeder, in the lowest cassette feeder there is no interface connector provided between this and a lower feeder. Therefore, the lowerst cassette feeder cannot be used as the first or second cassette feeder.
Interface connector
Interface connector
First cassette feeder
Second cassette feeder
Interface connector
Third cassette feeder
Figure 10-103
10-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
II. OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
A.
Overview
Operation of the load used by the cassette feeder is controlled by commands sent
from the CPU (IC301) on the main unit’s DC controller PCB, based on the programme
stored in the CPU (IC601) on the feeder controller PCB.
DC controller PCB
CPU
(IC301)
[Output side]
[Input side]
Cassette feeder (first level)
Feeder controller
PCB (first level)
Photo-interrupter
• Pick-up sensor (PS651)
• Paper supply sensor (PS652)
Motor
• Feeder motor (M651)
CPU
(IC601)
Switch
• Cassette size detector
switch
Solenoid
• Pick-up solenoid (SL651)
Cassette feeder (2nd level)
Feeder controller
PCB (2nd level)
Photo-interrupter
• Pick-up sensor (PS651)
• Paper supply sensor (PS652)
Motor
• Feeder motor (M651)
CPU
(IC601)
Switch
• Cassette size detector
switch
Solenoid (SL651)
• Pick-up solenoid
Cassette feeder (3rd level)
Feeder controller
PCB (3rd level)
Photo-interrupter
• Pick-up sensor (PS651)
• Paper supply sensor (PS652)
Motor
• Feeder motor (M651)
CPU
(IC601)
Switch
• Cassette size detector
switch
Solenoid (SL651)
• Pick-up solenoid
Figure 10-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-3
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
III. FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB INPUT AND OUTPUT
Feeder controller PCB
Pick-up sensor
Paper sensor
PS651
+5V
J655-1
-3 PS651S*
-2
“0” when the PS651 detects paper.
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS301)
PS652
+5V
J655-4
-6
PS652S
-5
“1” when the PS652 detects paper.
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS302)
J654-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Cassette size
detector switch
PSIZ3
PSIZ2
Refer to page 7-6
PSIZ1
PSIZ0
+24V
J653-2
Pick-up solenoid
Feeder motor
SL651
M651
SL651D *
J652-1
-2
-3
-4
When “0”, the SL651 is ON
Refer to page 10-7
Figure 10-301
10-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
IV. OPERATION OVERVIEW
A.
Overview
Figure 10-401 is the concept figure of the structure of the cassette feeder.
The cassette feeder’s operation is controlled by the feeder controller PCB. The main
unit’s DC controller PCB sends the pick-up control signal to the feeder controller PCB.
When the feeder controller PCB receives the pick-up control signal, the feeder motor
(M651) begins to rotate, and the pick-up solenoid is turned ON. Once the paper has
passed through the separation roller in order for any double feeds to be extracted, the
paper is fed through the feed roller and the vertical path roller on its way to the main
unit.
Further, the mechanical pick-up mechanism and the paper size selector mechanism
of the cassette feeder perform in the same way as those of the main unit.
Main unit DC controller PCB
Serial communication
Feeder motor drive signal
Pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL651D)
Feeder controller PCB
Pick-up solenoid
Feed roller
Pick-up
Separator roller
roller
SL651
Vertical path
roller
M651
Feeder motor
Figure 10-401
The unit depicted above is fitted with an ADF. The construction of the main unit is
also the same for units not equipped with an ADF.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-5
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
B.
Basic Sequence
Main unit delivery
sensor (PS306)
Main unit paper leading
edge sensor (PS301)
Main unit registration
clutch (CL302)
Main unit registration
sensor (PS302)
Pick-up sensor
(PS651)
Pick-up solenoid
(SL651)
Feeder motor
(M651)
Main unit main motor
(M601)
Start Key ON
Condition: When 2 pieces of A4 paper are picked up from the first level cassette
feeder
Figure 10-402
10-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
V. FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL
A.
Operation
The feeder motor (M651) of this unit uses a stepping motor.
The A phase pulse circuit and the B phase pulse circuit, located on the feeder controller PCB, emit drive pulses (A • A* • B • B*). Changes in the order and frequency of
the pulses control the rotation.
Feeder controller PCB
+24V
A
J652-4
A phase
pulse
control
Drive
control
circuit
M651
A*
-3
B
-2
B*
-1
Feeder
motor
B phase
pulse
control
Figure 10-501
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-7
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
VI. JAM DETECTION
A.
Overview
The cassette feeder is equipped with a pick-up sensor (PS651), which monitors the
pick-up and feeding function. It is also equipped with a paper supply sensor, which
detects the presence or absence of paper.
According to a pre-programmed timing, the feeder controller PCB’s CPU (IC601)
performs checks to determine whether there is paper or not in the sensor area, as well
as checks for jams. When the sensor judges there is a jam, the main unit’s motor and
the feeder motor are immediately turned OFF, and a jam message is displayed on the
control panel.
Reference:
For more information regarding jam sensor timing after the main unit’s registration
sensor, please refer to the main unit’s service manual.
PS501
PS**
PS301
PS304
PS302
PS305
PS303
PS652
PS651
PS652
PS651
PS652
PS651
PS651: Pick-up sensor PS652: Paper sensor PS302: Registration sensor
Figure 10-601
10-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
B.
1.
Jam Sensing
Pick-up delay Jam
During the cassette feeding sequence, once the pick-up solenoid (SL301) is ON, if
the paper does not arrive at the pick-up sensor (PS303) within 3 seconds, the feeding
operation is retried. Once again, if the pick-up sensor does not come ON in the 3 seconds following the activation of the pick-up solenoid, the unit determines that a delay
jam has occurred.
Start signal
Second sheet pick-up
Retry feed
Pick-up solenoid
(SL651)
Pick-up sensor
jam check
Pick-up sensor
(PS651)
Approx.
3 seconds
Normal
Approx. Approx.
3 seconds 3 seconds
Abnormal
Feeder motor
(M651)
Figure 10-602
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-9
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
2.
Registration sensor delay jam
Following the activation of the pick-up sensors in each of the cassette feeder levels,
if the paper does not arrive at the registration sensor (PS302) within the designated
amount of time, a registration sensor delay jam has occurred.
These are the detection timings for each cassette feeder:
Pick-up level
Cassette feeder first level
Cassette feeder second-level
Cassette feeder third-level
Timer count time
Approx. 2.4 seconds
Approx. 2.8 seconds
Approx. 3.1 seconds
Table 10-601
Start signal
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS651)
Pick-up sensor
(PS651)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor
(PS302)
a’
seconds
Normal
Registration sensor
(PS302)
a’
seconds
Abnormal
Feeder motor
(M651)
Feeder motor
(M651)
Note: In the figure, ‘a’ seconds stands for the timing count times displayed in table
10-601.
Figure 10-603
10-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disassembly or assembly work.
Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-11
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
A.
Removing the feeder
motor
1) Remove the two screws, and take off
the cassette feeder’s rear cover.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
2) Remove the relay connector [1], and
remove the cord guide [2] from the
cable in the two places indicated on
the figure.
3) Remove the two screws [3], and
remove the feeder motor [4].
[3]
Figure 10-701
B.
Removing the pick-up/
feeder/separation motor
It is easier and more reliable to
remove the cassette feeder from the
main unit prior to attempting to remove
the pick-up/ feeder/separation motor.
1) Grip the pick-up tab [1], and remove
it from the pick-up drive shaft [2].
[2]
Lift up to remove
[1]
Figure 10-702
10-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
2) Open the hinge door a little, and
remove the right cover assembly [3].
Be careful not to open the hinge too
far.
[3]
Figure 10-703
3) While gripping the claw, remove the
feeder roller and the separation roller.
[4]
[5]
Figure 10-704
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-13
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
C.
Removing the pick-up unit
1) Remove the cassette feeder from the
main unit.
2) Remove the cassette.
3) Remove the rear cover of the cassette feeder.
4) Remove the connectors J652 and
J653 from the top of the feeder controller PCB [1], and remove the disconnected connector cables from the
cable guides, at three locations.
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Figure 10-705
5) Remove the two screws [3], and
remove the cord cover [4].
[3]
[4]
Figure 10-706
10-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER
6) Remove the relay connector [5] and
the cord guide [6] from the front rear
side of the cassette feeder.
[6]
[5]
Figure 10-707
7) Remove the 4 screws located in the
upper-right near side and far side [7],
and remove the right foot cover
assembly [8].
[7]
[7]
[8]
Figure 10-708
8) Remove the 6 screws [9], and
remove the pick-up unit.
[9]
Figure 10-709
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
10-15
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the installation method for this unit.
The unit’s depicted in the diagrams in this chapter have all been fitted with an automatic document feeder. For machines which are not fitted with an ADF, the installation
steps for the main unit are the same.
I.
II.
CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION
LOCATION.............................................11-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION.......11-3
A. Opening the package and removing
the packing materials .......................11-4
B. Installing the cartridge ......................11-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
C. Loading paper into the cassette .......11-8
D. Loading paper into the
multi-feeder ....................................11-11
E. Attaching the tray/Power cord ........11-12
F. Checking the Copy image ..............11-13
G. Setting the Fax machine function ....11-13
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
I. CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION LOCATION
The conditions relating to the installation location are listed below. It is therefore
advisable to read these conditions prior to the machine being brought into the customer’s premises.
A. The unit must be connected independently to an electrical outlet which provides the
rated power supply.
B. The ambient temperature must be between 5°C and 35°C, and the humidity must be
between 10 to 90%RH. Please do not place the unit near water faucets, hot-water
heaters, humidifiers or refrigerators.
C. Do not place the unit near a fire source, very dusty location, in a location where
ammonia gas may occur, or in direct sunlight. In situations where placing the unit in
direct sunlight is unavoidable, it is recommended that curtains be hung to protect the
unit.
D. The room should have good ventilation.
E. The legs of the copier should not rise up off the floor. The copier should be kept
level.
F. The machine should be set up at least 10 cm away from the wall, and there should
be enough space to perform maintenance on the machine.
(Please refer to the following page “operation space overview”)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-1
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
Operation space overview
The figure below outlines the space necessary for performing maintenance.
10 cm or more
70 cm
or more
160cm or more
Figure 11-101
The above figure shows a unit which has been fitted with an ADF. The required width
and depth for performing maintenance on machines which are not fitted with an ADF
is the same as for those depicted.
11-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
When bringing something metal from a cold environment into a warm environment,
drops of water may adhere to the metal surfaces. This phenomenon is known as condensation. If a machine is used while it has condensation on it, it is possible that it will
become unable to copy images. For this reason, when moving the machine from a cold
environment to a warm one, prior to installation, it is recommended that the machine be
allowed to sit in its packing material for at least an hour or more in order for it to warm
up to room temperature.
The steps for unpacking and installing this unit are outlined below.
A. Open the packaging and remove the packing materials.
B. Install the cartridge.
C. Load paper into the cassette.
D. Load paper into the multi-feeder.
E. Attach the tray and the power cord.
F. Check the copy image.
G. Set up the fax function (for those machines equipped with a fax function).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-3
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
A.
No.
Opening the package and removing the packing materials
Work details
1
Unpack the main unit, and take
out the accessory parts.
2
With at least two people, grasp
the handles on the left and right
side of the main unit, and lift the
unit out.
Illustration/ remarks
Handles
Handles
3
Unfasten the packing materials
around the main unit, and
remove the plastic, the cushioning materials and the tape.
Don’t forget to remove the tiewrap which has been fixed to
the cassette’s paper lifting plate.
Paper lifting plate
11-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Tie-wrap
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
Work details
4
Remove the mirror mount fixing
screw. Open the front cover of
the main unit and put the screw
in the storage compartment for
safekeeping.
Illustration/ remarks
Screw storage
compartment
Mirror mount fixing screw
Screw
5
B.
No.
Open the automatic document
feeder, and remove the filament
tape which has a stamp. (Only
for those machines which are fitted with an ADF).
One cause of document jams is the ADF is used
without the filament tape being removed. Thus, it is
very important to remember to remove the filament
tape.
Installing the cartridge
Work details
1
Lift the cartridge out of the box
while it is still in the original
packing material.
2
Open the front cover of the main
unit, and while pressing on the
release lever, pull the printer
assembly to the right.
Illustration/ remarks
Printer assembly
Front cover
Release lever
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-5
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
3
Work details
Illustration/ remarks
Remove the cartridge from the
pack. Be sure not to touch or
open the light-blocking shutter.
Light-blocking shutter
(Do not open)
4
5
11-6
Take the protective sheet off the
cartridge.
Protective sheet
While keeping the cartridge in
the position depicted in the figure, using the center as an axis,
slowly shake the cartridge in
both directions seven or eight
times, as if rotating it.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
Work details
6
While holding the knob, slowly
pull the tape out. When removing the tape, place it on a flat
level surface, and hold the cartridge firmly.
Illustration/ remarks
Tape
Pull out slowly
7
Open the printer assembly
cover, and slowly push the cartridge towards the back of the
main unit in the direction of the
guide arrows, till it can go no
further.
Cartridge
Cover
8
Close the printer assembly
cover, push it back into the main
unit, and close the front cover.
Cover
Front cover
Printer portion
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-7
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
C.
No.
1
Loading paper into the cassette
Work details
Illustration/ remarks
Lift the cassette up a little, and
pull it out until it stops.
Cassette
Pull out
2
Gently push on the paper lifting
plate of the cassette, where it
says “PUSH DOWN”. This locks
the paper lifting plate into the
cassette.
Push
Paper
lifting
plate
3
Turn the front paper width guide
knob to remove the lock, move
the guide to match the desired
paper width, and turn the knob
again to lock it.
Paper width guide
11-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
4
5
Work details
Following the ▲ mark on the
paper trailing edge position
plate, remove it by pushing it
down. Push down gently to
avoid damaging the paper trailing edge position plate.
Re-install the paper trailing edge
position plate to fit the desired
paper size, by reversing the
process outlined above.
Illustration/ remarks
Paper trailing edge
position plate
(Push down gently)
Paper trailing edge position plate
Paper lifting plate
6
Adjust the position of the paper
size sensor lever to fit the
desired paper size.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Paper size sensor lever
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-9
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
Work details
7
Remove the protective plastic
sheet from the paper size plate,
affix the correct paper size label
on the cassette.
Illustration/ remarks
Cassette size
label
8
Attach the Paper Set label to the
cassette, making sure that the
face with the instructions in the
appropriate language is in view.
9
After making the edges of the
paper stack even, place the
paper in the cassette.
Paper set label
Reference:
When the cassette is inserted
into the main unit while the
paper lifting plate is in the
locked position, the lock is
automatically released.
If the lock is accidentally
released, once again, softly
push on the cassette’s paper
lifting plate, where it says
“PUSH DOWN”. When the
paper lifting plate is locked,
place the paper in the cassette.
10
11-10
Confirm that the cassette tabs
are holding the edges of the
paper in place.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
Work details
11
While holding the cassette by
the center handles, gently insert
the cassette into the main unit
until it goes no further. Do not
insert the cassette while holding
on to the cassette on one side
only.
D.
No.
1
Illustration/ remarks
Hold the handle
Loading paper into the multi-feeder
Work details
Illustration/ remarks
Open the multi-feeder.
Multi-feeder
tray
2
Set the paper width guide and
the auxiliary guide to fit the
width and the length of the
desired paper.
Paper width guide
Auxiliary tray
3
After making the edges of the
paper stack even, place the
paper in the multi-feeder.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-11
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
No.
4
E.
Work details
Illustration/ remarks
Adjust the paper width guide to
the width of the paper.
Be sure to not press down on
the paper width guide.
Attaching the tray/Power cord
No.
Work details
1
Install the delivery tray provided.
Illustration/ remarks
Document
stacking tray
Delivery tray
2
Attach the included power cord
to the AC inlet of the main unit.
Power cord
11-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
F.
Checking the Copy image
No.
Work details
1
Connect the power cord to an
AC power outlet, and turn on the
power switch.
2
Set the document on the glass
or in the automatic document
feeder, and make a copy, using
either the cassette feeder or the
multi-feeder. Confirm the copy
image is correct.
3
Clean the area surrounding the
machine.
G.
Illustration/ remarks
Setting the Fax machine function
For those machines which have been equipped with the fax functions only.
1.
Executing an all-clear
No.
1
2
3
Work details
Illustration/ remarks
Press the Registration/Set Key
→ # key. This displays the service mode screen.
Service mode screen
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select
#8 CLEAR, and press the SET
key. This will display the #8
CLEAR screen.
#8 CLEAR screen
SERVICE MODE
# 1 SSSW
# 8 CLEAR
TEL
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select
ALL, and press the SET key.
This activates the all-clear function.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-13
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
2.
Setting the date and time (User mode operation)
No.
Work details
1
Press the Data Registration Key
to display the user mode screen.
Illustration/ remarks
User mode screen
SELECT AN ITEM
01 DATA REGISTRATION
02 TEL# REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION/SETTING
2
Confirm that 01 DATA REGISTRATION has been selected,
and press the Set key.
3
Confirm that 01 USER SETTINGS has been selected, and
press the set key.
4
Confirm that 01 DATE/TIME
SETTING has been selected,
and press the set key. The date
and time which had been previously set will be displayed.
5
Enter the current date and time.
Use the shift keys
to move
the cursor to enter the desired
numbers.
6
Press the set key. This sets the
date and time.
11-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
DATE/TIME SETTING
19/04/98
19:02
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
3.
Setting the dialing method
No.
Work details
1
Press the Data Registration Key
to display the user mode screen.
2
Confirm that 01 DATA REGISTRATION has been selected,
and press the set key.
3
Confirm that 01 USER SETTINGS has been selected, and
press the set key.
4
Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to select
11 TEL LINE TYPE, and press
the set key.
Illustration/ remarks
SELECT AN ITEM
01 ROTARY PULSE
02 TOUCH TONE
TEL LINE TYPE
5
4.
Use the shift keys to select
either 01 ROTARY PULSE or 02
TOUCH TONE, and press the
set key.
Communications test
No.
Work details
1
Press the fax key located on the
control panel to activate the fax
mode. If the fax mode is already
activated, this step may be
skipped.
2
Press the hook key located on
the control panel, and confirm
that a dial tone can be heard.
If a dial tone cannot be heard, please check the line.
3
Send and receive documents,
and confirm the machine operation and document image.
When there is a communications problem, please
follow the steps outlined below in the reference section, and adjust the output level and the NL.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Illustration/ remarks
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
11-15
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
5.
Adjusting the output level
No.
Work details
1
Press the Data Registration Key
→ # key. This displays the service mode screen.
2
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select
#2 MENU, and press the SET
key. This will display the #2
MENU screen.
3
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼ select
007, and press the SET key.
# 2 MENU
007
15
Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to
change the parameters, and
press the SET key.
4
6.
Illustration/ remarks
Adjusting the NL
No.
Work details
1
Press the Data Registration Key
→ # key. This displays the service mode screen.
2
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼ select
#2 MENU, and press the SET
key. This will display the #2
MENU screen.
3
Using the shift keys ▲ ▼ select
005, and press the SET key.
4
11-16
Illustration/ remarks
# 2 MENU
005
OFF
Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to select
either OFF or ON, and press the
SET key.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 12
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter explains the maintenance parts and inspection procedures for this
machine.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS.....12-1
ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE
PARTS ...................................................12-1
BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES .....12-2
CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND
HANDLING.............................................12-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Storage when the packing seal is
intact ................................................12-3
B. Storage and handling when the
packing seal has been opened ........12-4
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
I. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS
There are no parts in the unit that need to be periodically replaced.
II. ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE PARTS
It may be necessary to replace parts due to wear or damage more than once during
the warranty period. The expected life (number of pages) of parts that do not need to be
replaced until they fail is indicated below.
As of January, 1999
no.
Part Name
Part No.
1
2
Fixing assembly
Transfer corona
assembly roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller,
transport roller
Multi-feeder paper
feed roller
Multi-feeder separation pad
Exhaust fan
3
4
5
6
7
*1
*2
FG6-1259-000
RG5-3527-000
Number of
parts
1
1
Estimated Number
of Pages Copied
150,000
150,000
RB2-1821-000
RF5-2490-000
2*1
1 each *2
200,000
200,000
RB2-1820-000
1
200,000
RF5-2400-000
1
200,000
RH7-1354-000
1
25,000 hours
Remarks
25,000 hours
is 3 years of
24-hour continuous power
supply
A total of 4, including the main unit and a single level cassette feeder
A total of 8, including the main unit and a three-level cassette feeder
A total of 4, including the main unit and a single level cassette feeder (2 separation rollers and 2 transport rollers)
A total of 8, including the main unit and a three-level cassette feeder (4 separation rollers and 4 transport rollers)
Table 12-201
Caution:
The information in the table above is only an estimate, and may be revised in the light
of empirical data.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
12-1
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
III. BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES
This product has no areas which require periodic service. However, in order to
extend the life of the product and parts, we recommend the following procedures be carried out when carrying out service to replace consumable parts.
No.
1
Procedure
Greet the customer
2
Test copy
3
Clean the optical unit
4
Clean the transfer guide
5
Clean the separation and
transport parts
• Separation static charge
eliminator
• Transport belt
Clean the fixing and delivery assemblies
• Fixing assembly inlet
guide
Clean the copy board
glass
Make a test copy
Tidy up around the unit
6
7
8
9
Inspection Items
Consult about the
machine’s condition
a. Image density
b. Soiled background
c. Character clarity
d. Leading edge margin
e. Fixing, faulty synchronization, soiled reverse
side
Remarks
Clean with a blower brush.
When very soiled, use an
alcohol cleaner. Wipe the
white reference plate with a
dry cloth.
Remove the cartridge before
servicing.
Table 12-301
12-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
IV. CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND HANDLING
Cartridges are constantly influenced by the surrounding environment whether the
packaging is sealed or opened, or the cartridge is installed in the main unit. The cartridge will deteriorate over time regardless of the number of pages copied. The pace of
this deterioration over time depends on the installed and storage environments. Please
take sufficient care when storing and handling the cartridge.
A.
Storage when the packing seal is intact
Temperature
When cartridges are stored in a warehouse or workshop, do not place them in locations other than those listed in Table 12-401. Also, take heed of the following points.
• Do not store in direct sunlight.
• Do not store in a location subject to strong vibrations.
• Do not handle roughly or drop.
Normal
(90% of the total storage period)
Maximum
Extreme
temp.
(10% of the total
Minimum
storage period)
temp.
Humidity
Temperature variation
(within a 3-minute span)
0 to 35˚C
35 to 40˚C
-20 to 0˚C
40˚C to 15˚C
-20˚C to 25˚C
Normal
35 to 85%
(90% of the total storage period) relative humidity (RH)
Maximum
Extreme
85 to 95% RH
humidity
(10% of the total
Minimum
storage period)
10 to 35% RH
humidity
Atmospheric pressure
460 to760mmHg
(0.1 to 1 atmospheric
pressure)
Total warranty period
About 2.5 years
Table 12-401 Temperature and humidity conditions for storage
Caution:
The total warranty period is the period effective from the date of manufacture printed
on the cartridge packing box.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
12-3
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
B.
Storage and handling when the packing seal has been
opened
The photosensitive drum uses an organic photoconductor (OPC). The photosensitive
drum will deteriorate if exposed to strong light. Also, the cartridge contains toner, so
please provide customers with adequate explanations of storage and handling methods,
and advise them to always store the cartridge in a storage bag.
1.
Storage environment after the packing seal has been opened
a. Always store in the storage bag.
b. Do not store in direct sunlight, near a window or other bright places. Do not store in
an automobile for long periods of time.
Even when the cartridge is in the storage bag, do not leave it for long periods in
direct sunlight or in an automobile.
c. Do not store in extremely high or low temperatures or humidity, or in a location which
experiences dramatic changes in temperature or humidity. (For example, next to a
heater or air conditioner.)
d. Do not store in a location exposed to corrosive gases (insecticides, etc.) or in a location with air that has a high salt content.
e. Do not store in a location that is very dusty or filled with ammonia or organic solvent
fumes.
f. Do not store near computer monitors, disk drives or floppy disks. (The magnetism of
the cartridge may damage the data stored in these devices.)
g. Store out of reach of children and infants.
h. Store the cartridge between 0 to 35°C.
2.
Cartridge shelf life
The shelf life of a cartridge is 2.5 years from the date of manufacture. The production
date is displayed in abbreviated form on the cartridge. Also, for customer use, the expiration date , 2.5 years from the date of manufacture, is displayed on the cartridge packing box and on the main packing box. It is preferable to use up the cartridge before the
expiration date, because after that date the cartridge image quality deteriorates.
12-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
3.
Handling
a. When setting the cartridge in the copier, or when blank areas occur in the copy
image because toner runs out during copying, hold the cartridge level, as shown in
figure 12-401, and shake it several times at about 90Þ in both directions. After the
toner inside the cartridge has been leveled evenly, set the cartridge in the copier. If
the cartridge is shaken in a manner other than that described above, there is the
danger that toner may leak from the developing assembly and cleaning assembly.
Figure 12-401
In order to completely prevent output image stains due to toner leakage, be sure to
make 3-5 test copies after setting the cartridge in the copier.
b. As shown in Figure 12-402, do not hold the cartridge vertically or upside down. Also,
do not wave it about.
Figure 12-402
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
12-5
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
c. Do not manually open the shutter of the photosensitive drum on the bottom of the
cartridge. Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.
Caution:
If the surface of the photosensitive drum is accidentally soiled, wipe with a polishing
cloth dampened with toner. Do not wipe with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.
e. Do not subject to unnecessary vibration or shock.
Particularly, do not subject the photosensitive drum to pressure from the top of the
photosensitive drum cover shutter.
f. When transporting the copier, remove the cartridge from the main unit. Place the
cartridge in the protective bag or wrap in a thick cloth and keep out of direct light.
g. Do not store near computer monitors, disk drives or floppy disks. (The magnetism of
the cartridge may damage the data stored in these devices.)
h. Store out of reach of children and infants.
g. The photosensitive drum is sensitive to strong light, so the cartridge is equipped with
a light-blocking shutter. However, if subjected to strong light for an extended period
of time, white spots and vertical bands may appear on the images. In that case,
refraining from use of the machine for as long as possible will result in almost complete recovery. However, in some cases the traces (white spots, vertical bands) may
not disappear.
Please note the following items.
Caution:
1. Perform jam removal and cartridge replacement promptly.
2. When the cartridge is removed from the copier and stored, or when using a color
cartridge, be sure to place the cartridge in a storage box or cover it with a cloth. Do
not leave the cartridge exposed, once removed from the main unit.
h. Instruct the user to return used cartridges to a designated collection center.
12-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Caution:
Do not incinerate used cartridges as there is a risk of bursting or explosion.
When a used cartridge must be disposed of, dispose of it as nonflammable trash.
Reference:
The cartridge will perfectly fit for use for copying if placed in darkness for 5 minutes
after exposure to 1,500lux intensity light (normal light) for 5 minutes,. However, do not
expose the cartridge to direct sunlight. The sun’s rays have a light intensity ranging
from approximately 10,000lux to 30,000lux.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
12-7
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the main unit’s maintenance servicing, standards and adjustments, faulty image countermeasures, machine malfunction countermeasures, feeding
malfunction countermeasures, layout and functions of electrical components, the service mode and self-diagnostic mechanisms.
This chapter contains illustrations of a copier with automatic document feeder (ADF)
attached.
For information regarding the ADF mechanism, refer to the appended ADF-H1 service manual.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS.....13-2
A. Machanical system ..........................13-2
B. Electrical System .............................13-9
IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-15
A. Initial check ....................................13-15
B. Treatment procedures by faulty
image type .....................................13-17
C. Operation malfunction
countermeasures ...........................13-26
FAULTY FEEDING
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-34
A. Overview ........................................13-34
B. Copy paper jam..............................13-35
C. Faulty feeding ................................13-38
ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/
FUNCTIONS ........................................13-39
A. Clutches, solenoids ........................13-40
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Motor, fan .......................................13-42
Sensors ..........................................13-44
Switches, lamps, miscellaneous ....13-46
PCBs ..............................................13-48
Variable resistor(VR)/LED/check
pin listed by PCB plate ...................13-50
V. SERVICE MODE..................................13-55
A. Overview ........................................13-55
B. Operating Procedures ....................13-56
C. Service mode menu list..................13-57
D. SSSW Default Setting ....................13-63
E. Parameter settings .........................13-78
F. Test Mode (TEST MODE)............13-111
VI. REPORTS..........................................13-142
A. User reports .................................13-142
B. Service report...............................13-145
VII. USER ERRORS.................................13-163
VIII. SERVICE ERRORS ...........................13-170
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Reading the procedure chart
The procedure chart used in this chapter is a general flowchart that has been adapted to table form.
Below is an example and an explanation of how to use it.
Example: No AC power
Cause
Power plug is
disconnected
A cover is not
completely
closed
There is no
original power
source
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Is the power plug connected to the
1
NO Plug the power plug
outlet?
into the outlet.
Is the front cover completely closed? NO Close the cover.
2
3
4
Is the prescribed voltage being supplied to the outlet?
Is the prescribed voltage being supplied between J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is
the power cord mount area.)
NO
Explain to the customer
that the trouble is not
caused by the copier.
YES Check from Item 6.
(The remainder of the table has been omitted.)
■ When you only want to know the cause of a malfunction (the name of the part
thought to be malfunctioning), refer to the table’s Cause column.
In the case of “AC power source is not being supplied” described above, problems
such as an unconnected power plug, incomplete closing of a cover, and no original
power source can be considered as causes.
■ When you want to repair or know the checking procedure for a malfunction, check
the items in the Action column. Answer yes or no to the items in the Items to Check
column. If your answer matches the answer in the Result column, then perform the
procedure described in the Action column.
If the answer does not match the Result column, proceed to the next item and check
in the same manner.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-1
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A.
1.
Mechanical system
Right and left registration adjustment
Check that the front edge image margin of paper fed from each cassette is 2.5
± 2.0mm.
If the standards are off, adjust according to the procedure described below.
1) Remove the cassette from the cassette level that needs adjustment.
2) Loosen the hex screw and move the adjusting plate back and forth. Adjust by lining
up with the 1mm interval scale marks.
(–)
(+)
2.5 ± 2.0mm
0
2
Scale
4
1mm
6
8
10
Hex wrench
Figure 13-101
13-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Image leading edge margin adjustment
Adjustment when the leading edge of the printed image is out of alignment.
a) Use a precision screwdriver to press down on SW401 and output a test print.
b) Turn VR401 and adjust the leading edge margin of the test print to 4.0 ± 2.0mm.
SW401
VR401
4.0 ± 2.0mm
VR401
Precision screwdriver (3mm)
Figure 13-102
3.
Attaching the scanner wire
Attach the wire, following steps 1 to 9. Then perform the mirror positioning adjustment described on the next page.
Pulley clip
[4]
[2]
[1]
Attach the mirror
positioning plate.
Put the steel
ball into the
pulley hole.
Wrap the wire
2 times to the
inner side and
7 times to the
outer side.
Then, attach
the pulley clip.
[3]
[2]
[5]
[6]
Figure 13-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-3
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
Mirror positioning adjustment
a)
Adjusting position of No. 2 mirror mount
If the optical section wire pulley’s hexagonal fixing nut has been loosened, follow the
procedures described below to adjust the position of the No. 2 mirror mount, and then
tighten the hexagonal nut.
Optical section wire pulley
Hexagonal nut
Figure 13-104
The mirror positioning tool used in the positioning of the No. 2 mirror mount is illustrated below.
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
When used to adjust the No. 2 mirror mount
(for rear use)
FY9-3009-040 (for rear use)
[C]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
When used to adjust the No. 2 mirror mount
(for front use)
FY9-3009-040 (for front use)
Figure 13-105
13-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
With the mirror positioning tool fitted in the holes shown below, tighten the optical
unit wire pulley’s hexagonal fixing nut.
for front use
for rear use
Figure 13-106
b)
Adjustment of distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts
With the optical system wire fixing tool for No. 1 mirror mount loosened, follow the
procedures described below to adjust the distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirror
mounts, and then tighten the fixing tool.
This adjustment should be performed after the operation to adjust the position of No.
2 mirror mount, as described above.
Screw
Screw
Fixing tool
Fixing tool
Figure 13-107
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-5
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
The mirror positioning tool used in the adjustment of the distance between No. 1 and
No. 2 mirror mounts is illustrated below.
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
FY9-3009-040 (for rear use)
When used to adjust the distance between
No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts (for rear use)
[C]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
FY9-3009-040 (for front use)
When used to adjust the distance between
No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts (for front use)
Figure 13-108
With the mirror positioning tool fitted in the holes shown below, attach the optical unit
wire hexagonal fixing tool.
for rear use
for front use
Figure 13-109
13-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.
Printer unit receptacle connector mount positioning adjustment
When the printer unit receptacle connector is removed or attached, adjust the mount
position, following the procedure described below.
1) Loosen the 3 receptacle connector screws.
2) Adjust so that the interval between the printer unit frame and the receptacle connector is 3.5 ± 0.5mm.
Printer unit
3.5 ± 0.5mm
Screws
Figure 13-110
6.
Check the pressure (nip width) of the fixing pressure roller
This machine has no adjustment mechanism for the fixing assembly nip width.
However, if the nip width is not correct, faulty fixing may occur.
Therefore, check the fixing assembly nip width by following the procedures described
below. If the nip width is outside the standards, replace the fixing assembly.
1) Make one solid black copy on size A3 paper.
2) Place the black side of the paper face down and set the solid black copy in the multifeeder.
3) When the leading edge of the paper comes out into the copy tray, quickly switch off
the power source and leave it as is for about 10 seconds.
4) Remove the paper as you would to clear a paper jam from the printer unit.
5) Measure the width of the part of the removed paper that is wet and shiny with toner.
Check that the width is within the range displayed in Table 13-101.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-7
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
c
Direction of
paper feed
Dimensions
15mm
Center of A3
size printer
paper
a
5.5 ± 1.0 (mm)
|c-a|
1.0 (mm) or less
|b-a|
1.0 (mm) or less
|b-c|
1.0 (mm) or less
15mm
a
Table 13-101
Figure 13-111
13-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Electrical System
Adjustment items for the electrical system include automatic shading correction and
image positioning adjustment. When the main parts listed for each below are replaced,
perform adjustments.
• When the scanning lamp is replaced: automatic shading adjustment
• When the CCD unit is replaced: automatic shading adjustment
• When the image processor circuit board is replaced: image positioning adjustment,
automatic shading adjustment
1.
Automatic shading adjustment
1) Open the 3 covers of the control panel’s one-touch panel. Set the slide switch ON
2) Enter the service mode and select TEST MODE. (See page 13-111)
3) Press 2 on the control panel’s numeric keypad. (TEST MODE”: CCD will be selected.)
4) When you press 8 on the numeric keypad, automatic shading adjustment will start.
5) When OK is displayed on the display, the adjustment is finished.
6) After pressing the control panel stop key, press the clear key. (To exit TEST MODE.)
7) Turn the control panel slide switch OFF.
2.
Image positioning adjustment
1) Make a test chart with marks every 1cm from the leading and left edges of the page,
as shown in the figure below.
Leading edge
Left edge
10mm
10mm
Mark a line
A4 size copy paper
Figure 13-112
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-9
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2) Select 9.BOOK from service mode #6 SCANNER. Set 1 in 018.
3) Set the test chart you made on the copyboard glass with the image facing down.
Leading edge
CARD
A5
Left edge
B5
A4
A5
B5
A4
B4
A3
10mm
10mm
Document
(Image facing down)
CARD
A5
B5
A5
A4
B5
B4
A4
A3
Figure 13-113
4) Copy the image enlarged to 400%.
5) Measure the length of the leading and left edges of the copied image (see the figure
below).
Leading edge
Left edge
Output image (400% enlarged copy)
Figure 13-114
6) Refer to Table 13-102. Work out the input value that corresponds to the measurement taken in step 5.
7) Select 8. CCD from service mode #6 SCANNER. Enter the value worked out from
the leading edge data, 007, and the left edge data, 010 in step 6).
8) Select 9.BOOK from service mode #6 SCANNER. Set 1 in 018.
9) Exit service mode. Copy the image at 100%. Check that the copied image and the
original document positioning matches.
13-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Feed direction (leading edge)
Actual measurement Input measurement
30.0
41
31.0
40
32.0
39
33.0
38
34.0
37
35.0
36
36.0
35
37.0
34
38.0
33
39.0
32
40.0
31
41.0
30
42.0
29
43.0
28
44.0
27
45.0
26
46.0
25
47.0
24
48.0
23
49.0
22
50.0
21
Main scanning direction (left edge)
Actual measurement Input measurement Actual measurement Input measurement
30.0
118
40.2
158
30.3
119
40.4
159
30.5
120
40.7
160
30.8
121
40.9
161
31.0
122
41.2
162
31.3
123
41.4
163
31.5
124
41.7
164
31.8
125
41.9
165
32.0
126
42.2
166
32.3
127
42.4
167
32.5
128
42.7
168
32.8
129
43.0
169
33.0
130
43.2
170
33.3
131
43.5
171
33.6
132
43.7
172
33.8
133
44.0
173
34.1
134
44.2
174
34.3
135
44.5
175
34.6
136
44.7
176
34.8
137
45.0
177
35.1
138
45.2
178
35.3
139
45.5
179
35.6
140
45.7
180
35.8
141
46.0
181
36.1
142
46.3
182
36.4
143
46.5
183
36.6
144
46.8
184
36.9
145
47.0
185
37.1
146
47.3
186
37.4
147
47.5
187
37.6
148
47.8
188
37.9
149
48.0
189
38.1
150
48.3
190
38.4
151
48.5
191
38.6
152
48.8
192
38.9
153
49.1
193
39.1
154
49.3
194
39.4
155
49.6
195
39.7
156
49.8
196
39.9
157
50.0
197
Actual measurement: value of markings on image enlarged to 400%
Input measurement: value input in service mode.
Table 13-102
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-11
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
Sensor check
Assessment of the status of the photo-interrupter is performed by the SENSOR test
in the TEST MODE. The procedure is as described below.
1) On the control panel, press the Entry/Setting key, then the # key to enter the service
mode.
2) Press the shift keys (up arrow, down arrow) to select TEST MODE.
3) Press 6 on the numeric keypad to select FACULTY TEST.
4) Press 3 on the numeric keypad to enter sensor check mode. The image below will
be displayed.
6-3 : SENSOR
[ 1 ] --- [ 7 ]
Figure 13-115
5) When the display shown in Figure13-110 is displayed, push 1,2,3 and 4 on the
numeric keypad. The status of each sensor will be displayed. The following is an
example and explanation of what happens when you push 1 on the numeric keypad.
Sensor name
Sensor’s present status
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
Sensor’s present status
Sensor name
DS of means that the automatic document
feeder’s (ADF) document sensor (DS) is off.
Figure 13-116
6) Move each sensor’s flag and verify that the display shows of (OFF)/on (ON) repeatedly.
The following page shows the display and sensor name, and the status of each sensor when the main unit is in stand-by when keys 1-4 of the numeric keypad are
pressed.
13-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
Press 1 on the numeric keypad
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: document sensor* (PS801) :on/document present, off/no document
DES: document edge sensor* (PS805):on/document present, off/no document
DOC: document width sensor* (PS851, PS852): displays document width by combination of
the 2 sensor’s ON/OFF status
CRG: toner cartridge sensor: on/of toner cartridge present/no toner cartridge
DCVS: paper feed sensor: on/ paper is not detected (in stand-by, with the lower right cover closed)
of/ paper is detected (in stand-by, with the lower right cover open)
*Displays the status of each ADF sensor
Press 2 on the numeric keypad
HPS on RES on BCVS of
NDFS of DLS0 of DLS1 of
HPS: scanner home position sensor: on/the scanner is in the home position
of/ the scanner is not in the home position
RES: Not used
BCVS: copyboard cover open/close sensor (PS102): on/cover open, of/cover closed
NDFS: document length sensor1* (PS802): on/document present, of/no document
DLS0: document length sensor2* (PS803): on/document present, of/no document
DLS1: Reserved
*Displays the status of each ADF sensor
Press 3 on the numeric keypad
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
CT1: main unit cassette paper sensor (PS305): on/paper present, of/no paper
main unit cassette paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT2: level 1 cassette feeder paper sensor (PS651): on/paper present, of/no paper
level 1 cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT3: level 2 cassette feeder paper sensor (PS651): on/paper present, of/no paper
level 2 cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT4: level 3 cassette feeder paper sensor (PS651): on/paper present, of/no paper
level 3 cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
Press 4 on the numeric keypad
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT: multi-feeder paper sensor (PS501): on/paper present, of/no paper
Displays A4/set paper size.
TN: toner sensor: on/toner remaining, of/no toner
RS: Reserved
JAM: jam detection status: on/jam detected, of/no jam detected
Figure 13-117
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-13
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
Image processor PCB replacement procedures
The procedures which must be performed when replacing the image processor PCB
are described below.
■
Procedures performed at the time of replacement
• For machines with a FAX function, output system data list, one-touch/speed
dial/group dialing list, user data list, activity management report and system dump
list.
• For machines with a FAX function, output all transmitted and received images.
• Turn off the power switch and remove jumper plug (JP3) before replacing the PCB.
• If additional memory has been added, remove the memory after removing jumper
plug JP1 from the image processor PCB.
• Remove the ROM DIMM.
Caution:
When the jumper plug (JP3) is removed, all the data recorded in the control memory
are erased. Accordingly, when the jumper plug (JP3) is to be removed, make sure the
control data have been printed out.
• User data: data that are set when the user presses the control panel's entry/setting
key
• Service mode data: setting data for the service mode
• Management data: activity management record (the previous 40 transactions), system dump record
■
Procedures performed after replacement
• Install ROM DIMM.
• Install additional memory. When installing additional memory, do it when the
jumper plug (JP1) is removed from the image processor PCB, or when it is in the
OFF position.
• Set jumper plug JP1 to the ON position.
• Attach the jumper plug (JP3) that was removed prior to replacement of the PCB.
• Turn on the main unit power switch. If DATA ERROR is displayed, press the set key
on the control panel.
• Input the user data and service mode data.
• See page 13-9. Perform automatic shading correction and image positioning
adjustment.
13-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
II. IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION COUNTERMEASURES
A.
Initial check
1.
Setting environment
a. Power voltage is maintained the rated voltage ± 10V. (The power cord should not be
disconnected at night.)
b. Do not place in a location subject to high temperature and humidity (near a water
faucet, hot water heater, or humidifier), a cold location, near naked flame or in a
dusty location.
c. Do not place in an area with ammonia fumes.
d. Do not place in direct sunlight. When it is not possible to avoid this, advise the user
to hang curtains on the window or take other measures to reduce the light.
e. Choose a well-ventilated location
f. Choose a location where the machine will sit level
g. The machine should be supplied with power 24 hours a day. Check that the
machine is placed in a location that fulfills the conditions cited above.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-15
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Check the document for symptoms of trouble
Check if the cause of trouble is with the document or with the machine.
a. Copy density correction is appropriate at a? graduation of 5+/-1.?
b. It is difficult to get satisfactory contrast on a red background.
Example; red sheet or accounting sheet
c. Check the document density
Example;
Document is a diazo copy
Document with transparency …Easily mistaken for fogging
}
Documents written in light pencil are easily mistaken as being too faint images.
3.
Check if there is dirt or scratches on the copyboard cover, copyboard glass or
the white reference plate
If there is dirt, clean with a mild detergent or alcohol. If there are scratches, replace
the scratched part.
4.
Check the cartridge
If the surface of the photosensitive drum is scratched, replace the cartridge.
5.
Check the paper
a. Is Canon recommended paper being used?
b. Is the paper damp?
Load new packing paper and make a test copy.
6.
Other
In winter, especially upon installation, sometimes moisture condensation occurs
within the machine and causes various problems when a machine is suddenly moved
from a cold warehouse and set in a warm room.
Example;
a. The image becomes faint due to moisture condensation in the scanning assembly
(glass, mirror, lens, etc.)
b. Leak current develop from condensation in the charging assembly.
c. Paper jams occur due to condensation of the pick-up and feeder guides.
When condensation occurs, wipe the parts dry and leave the machine supplied with
power for 60 minutes.
13-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Treatment procedures by faulty image type
Before looking for the cause of printing failure, check that the user is using recommended paper which is stored in a proper environment. When printing failure can be
resolved by use of the recommended paper which is stored in a proper environment,
advise that the user use the recommended paper or instruct the user in storage methods for recording paper.
too light
too dark
blank
polka dots
soiled back
solid black
vertical lines
dirt
fuzzy black lines
blank areas
(NB)
white vertical line
(white line)
white horizontal line
(white line)
leading edge
displacement
paper
feed
direction
image distortion blurring
partial image shrinkage/image stretching
Figure 13-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-17
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
Too Light
Cause
Copy paper
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
When new (unopened) copy paper is YES 1. The paper may be
1
used, does the density become
damp. Advise the
darker?
user on paper storage methods.
2. If paper other than
the recommended
paper is being used,
explain to the user
that this may cause
an inferior image.
2
Make a test print following the direcNO Check from Step 10.
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
image too light?
Interrupt and stop the machine while YES Check from Step 8.
3
the image is being printed onto photosensitive drum. Is the toner being
developed on the drum surface?
Remove the cartridge. Does the
Cartridge
4
YES End
problem improve after the cartridge
has been lightly shaken 5 or 6
times?
Check the connection between conPoor connector
5
NO Connect firmly.
nector J304 on the DC controller
connection
PCB and the laser scanner unit. Is it
normal?
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
Cartridge
6
tridge is replaced?
(primary charging roller)
Laser scanner
7
Is the trouble resolved when the
YES End
laser scanner unit is replaced?
unit
DC controller
NO Replace the DC conPCB
troller PCB
Transfer guide
8
Transfer charging roller contact
Transfer charging roller
Dirty scanner
assembly
9
13-18
When the transfer guide and other
metal parts are measured by a
tester, is the electrical resistance 0
ohms?
Check the transfer charging roller
and the high voltage contact point.
Are they dirty?
NO
Check that no screws
or other metal parts
have fallen near the
transfer guide.
YES Clean the contacts.
NO
10
Does the image improve when the
mirror and lens dust proof glass are
cleaned?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Replace the transfer
charging roller.
YES End
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Shading correction
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
11 Is the trouble resolved when autoYES End
matic shading correction is performed? (see page 13-9)
Poor connector 12 Is the flat cable which connects J208 NO Connect the cable firmconnection
ly.
on the image processor PCB and
(between the
the CCD unit properly connected?
CCD unit and
the image
processor
PCB)
Is the trouble resolved when the
CCD unit
13 CCD unit is replaced?
YES End
Image procesNO Replace the image
sor PCB
processor PCB.
2
Too Dark
Cause
Dirty scanner
assembly
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Is the trouble resolved when the
1
YES End
scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirror and lens are cleaned?
Is the trouble resolved when autoAutomatic
2
YES End
matic shading correction is pershading correction
formed? (see page 13-9)
Cartridge
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
3
tridge is replaced?
Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it. When this is
High-voltage
4
mity of the high-voltage contact point
contact point
not possible, replace
pin (JH402) on the DC controller
pin on the DC
the DC controller PCB.
controller PCB
PCB?
Developing
Is the trouble resolved when the DC
5
YES End
controller PCB is replaced?
bias
Image procesNO Replace the image
sor PCB
processor PCB.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-19
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Blank
Cause
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Make a test print following the direc1
NO Check from Item 9.
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
image blank?
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
Cartridge
2
tridge is replaced?
Is there dirt on the contact point that YES Clean the contact
High-voltage
3
supplies high-voltage to the carcontact point
point.
tridge? (Remove the cartridge and
check.)
Is the transfer charging roller proper- NO Reinstall the transfer
Transfer charg4
ing roller
ly installed?
charging roller.
Check the contact between connec5
NO Reconnect the connecPoor connector
tor J304 on the DC controller PCB
contact
tor.
and the laser scanner unit. Is it prop(between the
erly connected?
laser scanner
unit and the DC
controller PCB)
Laser scanner
6
Is the trouble resolved when the
YES End
unit
laser scanner unit is replaced?
High-voltage
Are troubles occurring due to defor7
YES Repair it. When this is
contact point
mity of the high-voltage contact point
not possible, replace
pin on the DC
pins (JH401, JH402, JH403) on the
the DC controller PCB.
controller PCB
DC controller PCB?
DC controller
Is the trouble resolved when the DC
8
YES End
PCB
controller PCB is replaced?
Poor connector
Check the connection of the flat
9
NO Reconnect the cable.
contact
cable between connector J208 on
(between the
the image processor PCB and the
CCD unit and
CCD unit. Is it properly connected?
image processor PCB)
CCD unit
10 Is the trouble resolved when the
YES End
CCD
unit
is
replaced?
Image procesNO Replace the image
sor PCB
processor PCB.
13-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
Solid black
Cause
Scanning lamp
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Is the scanning lamp lit while copy1
NO See the “Scanning lamp
ing?
does not light” section.
Is there dirt on the contact point that YES Clean the contact
Cartridge (pri2
supplies high-voltage to the carpoint.
mary charging
roller bias fault)
tridge?
Cartridge
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
3
tridge is replaced?
Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it. When this is
High-voltage
4
mity of the high-voltage contact point
contact point of
not possible, replace
pin JH401 on the DC controller
the DC conthe DC controller PCB.
troller PCB
PCB?
CCD unit
5
YES End
Is the trouble resolved when the
CCD
unit
is
replaced?
Image procesNO Replace the image
sor PCB
processor PCB.
5
Polka dots
Cause
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Cartridge (phoIs the surface of the photosensitive
1
YES Replace the cartridge.
tosensitive
drum scratched?
drum)
Transfer charg2
Is the transfer charging roller dirty?
YES Clean the roller. If it is
ing roller
scratched, replace it.
Static charge
3
Is the static charge eliminator dirty?
YES Clean the static charge
eliminator
eliminator.
Re-charging
4
Is the re-charging eliminator dirty?
YES Clean the re-charging
eliminator
eliminator.
DC controller
5
Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it.
PCB
mity of the high-voltage contact point
NO Replace the DC conpin JH401 on the DC controller PCB?
troller PCB.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-21
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
Soiled back
Cause
Dirt in paper
feed path
Transfer guide
Static charge
eliminator
Re-charging
eliminator
Transfer charging roller
Registration
roller
Fixing assembly inlet guide
7
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Check the paper feed path. Is it
1
YES Clean the paper feed
dirty?
path.
Is there toner on the surface of the
2
YES Clean the transfer
transfer guide?
guide.
Is there toner on the static charge
3
YES Clean the static charge
eliminator?
eliminator.
Is there toner on the re-charging
4
YES Clean the re-charging
eliminator
eliminator.
Is the dirt’s cycle at an approximately YES Clean the transfer
5
54mm pitch?
charging roller.
Is the dirt’s cycle at an approximately YES Clean the registration
6
52mm pitch?
roller.
Is the trouble resolved when the fix7
YES End
ing assembly inlet guide is cleaned?
NO Replace the fixing
assembly.
Black Lines (thin vertical lines)
Cause
Scanner
assembly
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Make a test print following the direc- YES Clean the copyboard
1
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
glass, mirrors 1 to 4
image normal?
and the lens.
Is the trouble resolved when the
CCD unit
2
YES End
CCD unit is replaced?
Remove the cartridge and check the YES Replace the cartridge.
Cartridge (pho3
surface of the photosensitive drum.
tosensitive
Are there scratches in the drum’s
drum)
direction of rotation?
Primary charg4
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
ing roller
tridge is replaced?
Dirty fixing
Is the trouble resolved when the fix5
YES End
assembly inlet
ing assembly inlet guide is cleaned?
guide
Fixing
NO Replace the fixing
assembly
assembly.
13-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
8
Vertical Fogging
Cause
Exposure system
Cartridge
External light
9
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Make a test print following the direc- YES Clean the copyboard
1
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
glass, mirrors 1 to 4
image normal?
and the lens.
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
2
tridge is replaced?
NO Check that no external
light is reaching the
photosensitive drum.
Fuzzy Horizontal Black Lines
Cause
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Connection
Is the flat cable connecting the
1
YES Replace the cable.
fault due to
inverter PCB and the image procespoor contact of
sor PCB almost broken?
the flat cable
2
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
Poor drum sentridge is replaced?
sitivity of the
developer cylinder drum
Fixing
NO Replace the fixing
assembly
assembly.
10 Dirt
Cause
Copyboard
glass
Toner spillage
Fixing assembly
Cartridge
Steps
Checks
Make several copies consecutively.
1
Does the dirt always occur in the
same place?
Does the dirt occur at random?
2
3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Does the dirt’s cycle occur at an
approximately 75mm pitch?
Yes/No
Action
YES Clean the copyboard
glass.
YES Check if toner is spilling
from the cartridge.
YES Replace the fixing
assembly.
NO Replace the cartridge.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-23
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
11 White Strips (vertical)
12 Thin White Lines (vertical)
Cause
Exposure system
Steps
Checks
Make a test print following the direc1
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
image normal?
Transfer charging roller
2
Is there dirt on the transfer charging
roller?
Separation static charge eliminator
Cartridge
Fixing
Assembly
3
Is there dirt on the separation static
charge eliminator?
4
Is the trouble resolved when the cartridge is replaced?
Yes/No
Action
YES Clean the white reference plate, on the back
of the copyboard glass,
and mirrors 1-4.
YES Clean the roller. If
cleaning does not solve
the problem, replace
the roller.
YES Clean the separation
static charge eliminator.
YES End
NO Replace the fixing
assembly.
13 Leading Edge Displacement
Cause
Steps
Checks
Document
1
Is the document set properly?
Paper curl
2
Is the paper very curled?
Paper overload
3
Is the amount of paper set in the
cassette over the limit?
Yes/No
Action
NO Reset the document.
YES Replace the paper.
YES Explain to the user that
each cassette can hold
a maximum of 250
sheets of paper.
Are the rollers of the pick-up level on NO Check each roller. If
any are worn, replace
which the displacement occurs northem.
mal?
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation
roller
Registration
roller
4
5
Is the registration roller normal?
Faulty adjustment of leading
edge margin
DC controller
PCB
6
Is the trouble resolved when the
leading margin adjustment procedures described on page 13-3 are
performed?
13-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
NO
If the registration roller
is dirty, clean it. If it is
worn, replace it.
YES End
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
14 Blurring
Cause
Scanner wire
Scanner rail
Cartridge
Printer unit
main drive
assembly
Check connector connection
(between the
laser scanner
unit and the DC
controller PCB)
Laser scanner
unit
DC controller
PCB
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Is trouble occurring due to twisting or YES 1. Reattach the wire.
1
fraying of the wire that is wound onto
2. Replace the wire.
the wire pulley while the scanner is
moving?
Gently move mirror1 mount manual2
NO Clean the scanner rail
ly. Does it move smoothly?
with alcohol. Then
apply a small amount of
lubricant.
3
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
tridge is replaced?
Is slipping or fracturing occurring
4
YES Replace the gear.
due to gear wear of the printer unit
main drive assembly?
Check the connection of connector
5
NO Reconnect the connecJ304 on the DC controller PCB and
tor.
the laser scanner unit. Is the connector firmly connected?
6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Is the trouble resolved when the
laser scanner unit is replaced?
YES End
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-25
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
1
Operation malfunction countermeasures
No power
Cause
Power plug
Steps
Checks
Is the power plug connected?
1
No power supplied from outlet
2
Is the prescribed voltage being supplied to the outlet?
Fuse
3
Are fuses F3, F4 or F5 on the DC
power supply PCB blown?
DC power supply PCB
2
Yes/No
Action
NO Connect the power
plug.
NO Explain to the customer
that the trouble is not
caused by the
machine.
YES Investigate why the
fuse blew.
Replace the DC power
supply PCB.
No LCD display on the control panel
Cause
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Monitor/Display
Is the control panel display contrast
1
NO Reset the contrast volcontrast
adjustment volume properly set?
ume.
Poor connector
Are connectors J41 and J42 on the
2
NO Reconnect the conneccontact
control panel PCB and connector
tors.
J203 on the image processor PCB
properly connected?
Is the trouble resolved when the con- YES End
Control panel
3
trol panel is replaced?
Image procesNO Replace the image
sor PCB
processor PCB.
13-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Paper does not pick up (Main unit cassette)
Cause
Cassette
attachment
Paper set condition
Steps
Checks
Is the “No paper message” lit?
1
2
3
Is the pick-up roller rotating?
Is the cassette set properly?
4
Has too much paper been set in the
cassette? Has the paper been set
properly?
Is the trouble caused by wear, abrasion or cracking on the pick-up roller
surface?
Is the trouble caused by cracking or
damage to the gears in the pick-up
drive assembly?
Is connector J306 on the DC controller PCB properly connected?
Is the trouble resolved when the
pick-up solenoid is replaced?
Pick-up roller
5
Pick-up drive
assembly
gears
Faulty connector connection
Pick-up solenoid
DC controller
PCB
6
7
8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
Action
YES Refer to the “No paper
message does not go
out” section.
NO Check from Item 6.
NO Reset the cassette.
NO
Reset the paper.
YES Replace the pick-up
roller.
YES Replace damaged
gears.
NO
Reconnect the connector.
YES End
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-27
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
Paper does not pick-up (multifeeder)
Cause
Steps
Checks
Is the “Supply REC. paper” indicator
1
lit?
2
Paper set condition
3
Lifting plate
raising mechanism
Multifeeder
pick-up roller
4
Connector connection
6
Multifeeder
pick-up drive
assembly
DC controller
PCB
7
13-28
5
Yes/No
Action
YES Refer to the “Supply
REC. paper indicator
does not go out” section.
Is the multifeeder pick-up roller rotat- NO Check from Item 6.
ing?
Has too much paper been set in the
NO Reset the paper.
multifeeder? Has the paper been set
properly?
NO Check if the spring that
Does the lifting plate rise with the
lifts the lifting plate is
pick-up timing?
properly set.
Make a copy with the multifeeder
YES Check the multifeeder
pick-up. Is the pick-up roller rotating?
pick-up roller. Clean the
surface of the roller. If
that does not resolve
the problem, replace
the pick-up roller.
Check the wiring between connector
NO If the connectors are
making poor contact,
J307 and the multifeeder pick-up
solenoid (SL302).
reconnect them.
Are the multifeeder pick-up drive
YES Replace damaged
assembly gears damaged?
gears.
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Paper does not pick-up (cassette feeder)
Cause
Cassette
attachment
Paper set condition
Steps
Checks
Is the “Supply REC. paper” message
1
lit?
2
3
Is the pick-up roller rotating?
Is the cassette set properly?
4
Has too much paper been set in the
cassette? Has the paper been set
properly?
Is the cassette feeder pick-up roller
rotating?
Pick-up roller
5
Fuse on the
feeder controller PCB
Connector connection
6
Is the fuse on the feeder control
PCB (FU601) blown?
7
Pick-up solenoid (SL651)
8
Feeder motor
(M651)
Feeder controller PCB
9
Are connectors J652 and J653 on
the feeder controller PCB properly
connected?
Place the tester’s lead pin between
connectors J653-2 (+) and J653-1
(-) on the feeder control PCB. Set
the appropriate pick-up level. Press
the start key. Does the voltage go
from 0V to about 24V?
Is the trouble resolved when the
feeder motor (M651) is replaced?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
Action
YES Refer to the “Supply
REC. paper message
does not go out” section.
NO Check from Item 6.
NO Reset the cassette.
NO
Reset the paper.
YES Clean the roller surface. If the trouble is not
resolved, replace the
pick-up roller.
YES Find the reason why
the fuse blew.
NO
Reconnect the connectors.
YES Replace the pick-up
solenoid of the corresponding pick-up level.
YES End
NO
Replace the feeder
control PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-29
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
Registration roller does not rotate
Cause
Steps
Checks
Connector conCheck the wiring from connector
1
nection
J307 to the registration clutch
(CL302)
Is the trouble resolved when the
Registration
2
registration clutch (CL302) is
clutch (CL302)
replaced?
DC controller
3
PCB
7
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Scanner does not move forward
Cause
Scanner drive
wire
Foreign object
in the scanner
drive path
Steps
Checks
Is the scanner drive wire properly
1
attached?
Is there any dirt on the scanner rail?
2
Does it operate smoothly?
Poor connector
contact
3
Scanner motor
Image processor PCB
4
8
Yes/No
Action
NO If the trouble is a faulty
connection, reconnect
the connector.
YES End
Yes/No
Action
NO Attach the wire properly.
NO Check that there is no
dirt or debris on the
scanner rail surface
and that nothing is
touching the scanner.
Check the wiring from connector
NO If the trouble is caused
by a faulty connection,
J214 on the image processor PCB to
reconnect the connecthe scanner motor. Is it normal?
tor.
Is the trouble resolved when the
YES End
scanner motor is replaced?
NO Replace the image
processor PCB.
Scanning lamp does not illuminate
Cause
Scanning lamp
Inverter PCB
connector
Image processor PCB connector
Inverter PCB
Image processor PCB
13-30
Steps
Checks
Is the trouble resolved when the
1
scanning lamp is replaced?
Are the connections of CN1 and
2
CN2 on the image processor PCB
secure?
Is connector J207 on the image
3
processor PCB properly connected?
4
Is the trouble resolved when the
inverter PCB is replaced?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
YES End
Action
NO
Connect firmly.
NO
Connect firmly.
YES End
NO Replace the image
processor PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Speaker does not operate
Cause
Volume setting
Faulty connector connection
Speaker
Image processor PCB
Steps
Checks
Is the speaker volume in the user
1
mode set appropriately?
Is connector J211 on the image
2
processor PCB properly connected?
Is the trouble resolved when the
3
speaker is replaced?
Yes/No
Action
NO Reset the volume.
NO
Connect it properly.
YES End
NO Replace the image
processor PCB.
10 The “Set cartridge” indicator does not go out
Cause
Cartridge
High-voltage
contact point
pin (Main unit
and cartridge)
High-voltage
contact point
pin (DC controller PCB)
DC controller
PCB
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
1
Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
tridge is replaced?
2
YES Clean the Main unit or
Is there any dirt, such as toner, on
cartridge high-voltage
the Main unit or cartridge high-voltcontact point pin.
age contact point pins?
3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Is the DC controller PCB high-voltage contact point pin deformed?
YES Repair it.
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-31
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
11
The “Supply REC. paper” indicator does not go out (Main unit and cassette
feeder)
Cause
Cassette
attachment
Paper size
lever
Cassette lifting
plate raising
mechanism
Steps
Checks
Is the cassette properly mounted?
1
2
3
Paper supply
sensor flag
Connector connection
4
Paper supply
sensor
Cassette size
sensing switch
DC controller
PCB (feed controller PCB)
6
13-32
5
7
Is the cassette’s paper size lever out
of alignment or damaged?
Does the lifting plate rise when the
cassette is set into the Main unit?
Is the paper supply sensor out of
alignment or damaged?
Check the following connector connections
• When the problem cassette is the
Main unit cassette, check connectors J302, J306 on the DC controller PCB.
• When the problem cassette is a
cassette feeder cassette, check
connectors J654, J655 on the
feeder controller PCB
Are the connectors properly connected?
Is the trouble resolved when the
paper supply sensor is replaced?
Is the trouble resolved when the cassette size sensing switch is
replaced?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
Action
NO Reset the cassette.
YES Repair the paper size
lever.
NO Turn the cassette over
and check if the lifting
plate retaining roller is
damaged.
YES Replace the flag.
NO
Reconnect the connectors.
YES End
YES End
NO
If the problem cassette
is the Main unit cassette, replace the DC
controller PCB. If the
problem cassette is a
cassette feeder cassette, replace the corresponding feeder controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
12
The “Add paper” indicator does not go out (multifeeder)
Cause
Multifeeder
paper supply
sensor flag
Faulty connector contact
Sensor PCB
DC controller
PCB
Steps
Checks
Is the multifeeder paper supply sen1
sor flag operating properly?
2
3
Yes/No
Action
NO Repair the multifeeder
paper supply sensor
flag.
Is the cable between connector J309 NO Reconnect the connectors properly.
on the DC controller PCB and connector J501 on the sensor PCB
properly connected?
Is the trouble resolved when the sen- YES End
sor PCB is replaced?
NO Replace the DC controller PCB.
13 JAM indicator does not go out
Cause
Sensor flag
Sensor check
DC controller
PCB (feeder
controller PCB)
Steps
Checks
Are the jam detection sensors below
1
out of alignment or damaged?
• Pick-up sensor (PS303)
• Registration sensor (PS302)
• Leading edge sensor (PS301)
• Delivery sensor (PS304)
Check each sensor according to the
2
directions on page 13-127. Are they
normal?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
Action
YES Repair the sensor. If it
is damaged, replace it.
NO
Replace the faulty sensor.
YES Replace the DC controller PCB or the feeder controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-33
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
III. FAULTY FEEDING COUNTERMEASURES
A.
Overview
The primary locations where paper jams occur in this machine are as shown below.
[1] Pick-up assembly
[2] Feeder assembly
[3] Fixing/Delivery area
[2]
[3]
[1]
Figure 13-301
Reference:
The figure above depicts a machine with a 3-level cassette feeder. The feeder construction is the same on all levels. Accordingly, when only one cassette feeder level is
attached, the structure will be like the figure above with the bottom two levels
removed.
13-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
1
Copy paper jam
Pick-up assembly
Cause
Cassette
Steps
Checks
Does the trouble occur at cassette
1
pick-up?
Is the pick-up roller of the selected
2
pick-up level rotating?
Is the cassette set properly?
3
4
5
6
Paper
7
Is the trouble resolved when a different cassette is used?
Is the paper size lever set to the
proper position?
Does the cassette’s lifting plate rise
when the cassette is set into the
Main unit?
Has too much paper (limit 250
sheets) been set in the cassette?
Yes/No
Action
NO Check from Item 13.
NO
Check from Item 11.
NO
NO
Reset the cassette
properly.
Check from Item 7.
NO
Reset the lever.
NO
Check if the lifting plate
retaining roller is damaged.
YES Advise the user to use
the proper amount of
paper.
YES Replace the paper.
Advise the user of storage methods.
YES Advise the user to use
the recommended
paper.
NO Clean the roller. If the
trouble is not resolved,
replace the roller.
8
Is the paper curled, wavy or otherwise altered?
9
Is the trouble resolved when paper
recommended by Canon is used?
Roller wear
10
Connector connection
Pick-up solenoid (SL301)
11
Connector connection
Pick-up/feeding
clutch (CL301)
12
Check the surfaces of the pick-up,
feeder and separation rollers of the
selected pick-up level. Are they normal?
Check the status connection status
NO Reconnect properly.
of the following.
YES Replace the pick-up
Main unit pick-up cassette:
solenoid.
Cable between connector J306 on
the DC controller PCB and the pickup solenoid (SL301)
Cassette feeder:
Cable between connector J653 on
the feeder controller PCB and the
pick-up solenoid (SL651)
Check the cable connection between NO Repair the cable conconnector J307 on the DC controller
nection.
PCB and the pick-up/feeding clutch
YES Replace the pick(CL301). Is it normal?
up/feeding clutch
(CL301).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-35
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Multifeeder
pick-up roller
Lifting plate
retaining cam
Multifeeder
pick-up drive
assembly gear
Connector connection
Multifeeder
pick-up solenoid (SL302)
DC controller
PCB
13-36
Steps
Checks
Yes/No
Action
13 Is the multifeeder pick-up roller rotat- NO Check from Item 16.
ing?
14 Check the surface of the multifeeder
NO Clean the roller. If it is
pick-up roller. Is it normal?
worn or misshapen,
replace it.
15 Does the multifeeder lifting plate rise NO Check that the lifting
plate retaining cam isn’t
as the multifeeder pick-up roller
rotates?
out of alignment.
16 Are the multifeeder pick-up drive
YES Replace damaged
assembly gears damaged?
gears.
17
18
Check the wiring from connector
J307 on the DC controller PCB to
the multifeeder pick-up solenoid
(SL302). Is it normal?
Is the trouble resolved when the multifeeder pick-up solenoid (SL302) is
replaced?
NO
YES End
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Reconnect the connectors.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Feeder assembly
Cause
Copy paper
Steps
Checks
1
Is the registration roller rotating?
2
Is the trouble resolved when paper
recommended by Canon is used?
Registration
roller
3
Registration
roller engagement mechanism
Feeder belt
drive mechanism
Feeder belt
4
Yes/No
Action
NO Check from Item 7.
YES Explain to the user to
use the recommended
paper.
Check the surface of the registration
NO Clean the dirt. If the
roller is worn or misroller. Is it normal?
shapen, replace it.
Is the nip width between the registra- NO Check if the engagement spring is
tion roller and the registration
stretched out.
engagement roller normal?
5
Is the feeder belt rotating?
NO
Check if the feeder belt
drive gear is damaged.
6
Check that no dirt is stuck to the
feeder belt. Is it normal?
NO
Connector connection
7
NO
Registration
clutch (CL301)
DC controller
PCB
8
Check the wiring from connector
J307 on the DC controller PCB to
the registration clutch (CL302). Is it
normal?
Is the trouble resolved when the registration clutch (CL301) is replaced?
Clean the belt surface.
If it is stretched out or
cracked, replace the
feeder unit.
Reconnect the connectors.
3
YES End
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Fixing/Delivery Area
Cause
Fixing assembly inlet guide
Steps
Checks
Check that there are no toner stains
1
on the fixing assembly inlet guide. Is
it normal?
Check the connection of connector
Connector con2
J308 on the DC controller PCB. Is it
nection
normal?
Is the trouble resolved when the fixFixing assem3
ing assembly is replaced?
bly
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Yes/No
Action
YES Clean the inlet guide.
NO
Reconnect the connector properly.
YES End
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-37
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
1
Faulty feeding
Double feeding
Cause
Paper amount
Paper condition
Steps
Checks
Is the cassette overloaded with
1
paper (over 250 sheets)?
2
Is the trouble resolved when new
paper is used?
3
Does double feeding occur at cassette pick-up?
Is the cassette separation claw misshapen?
Cassette claw
4
Separation
roller
5
Check the surface of the separation
roller. Is it normal?
6
Is the surface of the multifeeder separation pad or the separation subpad worn?
Torque limiter
Multifeeder
separation pad
Separation pad
pressure spring
2.
Yes/No
Action
YES Explain the cassette
paper capacity to the
user.
YES The paper may be
damp. Instruct the user
on storage methods.
NO Check from Item 6.
YES Repair the claw. If the
problem is not
resolved, replace the
cassette.
NO Clean the roller. If the
trouble is not resolved,
replace the separation
roller.
YES Replace the torque limiter.
YES Replace the pad.
NO
Check if the separation
pad pressure spring is
misshapen.
Creases
Cause
Steps
Checks
Pick-up assemTurn off the power source as the
1
bly
paper is passing through the feeder
assembly. Are there any creases or
skewing on the copy paper at this
time?
Is the trouble resolved when new
Paper condition
2
paper is used?
Fixing unit inlet
guide
Fixing unit
13-38
3
Is the trouble resolved when paper
recommended by Canon is used?
4
Is there any toner or debris on the
fixing unit inlet guide?
Yes/No
Action
YES Check the feeding
assembly rollers and
registration rollers.
YES The paper may be
damp. Instruct the user
on storage methods.
YES Request that the user
use the recommended
paper.
YES Clean the inlet guide.
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Replace the fixing unit.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
IV. ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/FUNCTIONS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-39
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
A.
Clutches, solenoids
SL303
SL301
CL302
CL301
SL302
SL651
Figure 13-401
13-40
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch, solenoid types
Symbol
Name
Clutch
CL
Solenoid
SL
Code
CL301
CL302
SL301
SL302
SL303
SL651
Function
Pick-up/feeder roller drive
Registration roller drive
Main unit pick-up roller drive
Multifeeder pick-up roller drive
Completion stamp drive
Cassette feeder pick-up roller drive
Table 13-401
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-41
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Motor, fan
M701
M801
FM301
M601
M651
Figure 13-402
13-42
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Motors, fans
Symbol
Name
Motor
M
Fan
Code
M601
M701
M651
M801
FM301
Function
Main motor
Scanner motor
Feeder motor (cassette feeder)
Laser scanner motor
Exhaust fan
Table 13-402
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-43
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
Sensors
PS101
PS102
PS306
PS305
PS501
PS302
PS303
PS301
PS304
PS652
PS651
Figure 13-403
13-44
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Sensors
Symbol
Name
Photointeruppter
Code
PS101
PS102
PS301
PS302
PS303
PS304
PS305
PS306
PS501
PS651
PS652
Function
Scanner home position sensor
Copyboard cover open/close sensor
Paper leading edge sensor
Registration paper sensor
Pick-up sensor
Paper width sensor
Cassette paper supply sensor
Delivery sensor
Multifeeder paper supply sensor
Cassette feeder pick-up sensor
Cassette paper supply sensor (cassette feeder)
Table 13-403
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-45
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
D.
Switches, lamps, miscellaneous
Speaker
H2
H1
LA20
SW301
TH1
SW101
SW201
SW651
Figure 13-404
13-46
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Switches, lamps, miscellaneous
Symbol
Name
Switch
Code
SW101
SW201
SW301
SW651
Power supply switch
Cassette size sensor switch (Main unit)
Front cover open/close sensor switch
Cassette size sensor switch (cassette feeder)
Lamp
LA20
Scanning lamp
Heater
H1
H2
Heater 1
Heater2
Thermistor
TH1
Thermistor
Speaker
Function
Speaker
Table 13-404
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-47
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
E.
PCBs
[14]
[12]
[13]
[15]
[2]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[11]
[10]
Figure 13-405
13-48
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
PCBs
Symbol
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
Name
Image processor PCB
DC controller PCB
Analog processor PCB
Control panel PCB
Control panel sub-PCB
Inverter PCB
Sensor PCB
DC power supply PCB
NCU PCB*
Modem PCB*
Modular PCB*
Laser scanner motor driver
Laser driver PCB
BD PCB
Main motor driver
Function
Image processing
DC load control
CCD drive/analog image processing
Control panel control
Control panel control
Scanning lamp illumination control
Test print switch/leading edge margin adjustment VR
DC power source
Fax transmission control
Fax transmission signal modulation/demodulation
Telephone line connection
Laser scanner motor drive
Laser drive
Laser beam sensor
Main motor drive
* Mounted only in machines with fax function installed.
Table 13-405
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-49
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
F.
Variable resistor (VR)/LED/check pin listed by PCB plate
Only the varistors, LEDs and check pins that need to be checked during field service
are listed below.
Note:
1. Some LEDs leak a small amount of current even when normal, and therefore glow
faintly even when they are off. Do not mistake this phenomenon for their being ON.
2. VRs which may be adjusted in the field:
VRs which must not be adjusted in the field:
Note:
Check pins not listed below are only for factory use, and their adjustment and check
requires special tools and measurement instruments. Their adjustments require a
greater degree of accuracy and must not be touched during field service.
13-50
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
1.
Image processor PCB
ON OFF
JP1
J205
BAT1
J208
J217
J203
J207 J212
J219
J216 J211
J214
J210
J204
J213
JP3
J209
BAT2
J201
J202
J215
Figure 13-406
• JP1 : Image memory backup battery (BAT1) electrification jumper plug
• JP3 : Data control (user data, service mode data) memory backup battery (BAT2)
electrification jumper plug
• BAT1 : Fax transmission image memory backup battery
• BAT2 : Control data (service mode data, user mode data) memory backup battery
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-51
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
DC controller PCB/ Sensor PCB
■
DC controller PCB
VR402
J311
J302
J310
J305
J301
J309
J308
J304
J307
J306
J303
JH401
T406
JH402
JH406
JH407
T403
Figure 13-407
VR402: For factory adjustment
■
Sensor PCB
VR401
J401
SW401
Figure 13-408
VR401 : VR for image leading edge margin adjustment
SW401 : Push switch for test print output
13-52
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
■
DC power supply PCB
J109
J106
J108
J111
J104
J107
Power switch
PN1
J105
J103
AC inlet
Figure 13-409
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-53
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
Feeder controller PCB (Cassette feeder)
J652
J653
J655
J651
J654
J656
Figure 13-410
13-54
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
V. SERVICE MODE
A.
Overview
The items which may be checked or set in the service mode are described below.
The service mode in this machine is structured along the lines of the conventional
facsimile service mode, and its contents and operation methods comply with that mode.
The service mode is divided into the following 13 blocks.
The service mode is divided into the 10 items (#1-#10) cited below. The test mode
(TEST MODE) is also included as a service mode item.
#1 SSSW: service software switch
Registration and settings for basic fax service functions such as error management, echo countermeasures, communications trouble countermeasures, etc.
#2 MENU: menu switch settings
Registration and settings for functions required at installation, such as NL equalizer and output levels.
#3 NUMERIC Param: numeric parameter settings
Numeric Parameters for various conditions for the T1 Timer setting function, etc.,
can be input.
#4A SPECIAL: special settings (some settings can be adjusted at the time of servicing)
#4B NCU: special settings (Do not change the settings)
#4C ISDN: Not adjustable
#5 TYPE: Country version settings
When the country version settings are programmed, the standard values for each
country are entered in the parameters for #1 SSSW-#4 NCU at one time.
#6 SCANNER: (some settings can be adjusted at the time of servicing)
When setting this item in the field, do not change the settings for items other than
8: CCD, when adjusting image positioning, as this may result in a deterioration of
scanned image quality.
#7 PRINTER: printer function settings
Registration and setting items for basic service functions, such as conditions for
reducing reception images.
#8 CLEAR: data initialization mode settings
Initializes data to initial setting values.
#9 ROM: ROM management
Displays the version number of ROM DIMM on the image processor PCB.
#10 CS SET: mirror 1 mount initial setting
Moves the mirror 1 mount to the position set at the time of shipping from the factory.
TEST MODE: Runs tests. (See page 13-111 for details)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-55
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Operating Procedures
The service mode operates according to the flow displayed in the chart below.
MANUAL RX
READY TO SEND
13/01 ’99
WED 09:04
=
STANDARD STANDARD
RESOLUTION
DENSITY
TEXT
SHEET
IMAGEQUALITY
BOOK SENDING
1) Select user mode
Press the data registration key.
SELECT AN ITEM
01 DATA REGISTRATION
02 TEL# REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION/SETTING
1) Select service mode
Press the # key on the user mode screen.
SERVICE MODE
#1 SSSW
3) Select menu item
Press the up ▲ or down ▼ shift key.
SERVICE MODE
# 3 NUMERIC Param.
Press the set key.
#3 NUMERIC Param.
001:
0
4) Enter or set data
Input data and press the set key.
#3 NUMERIC Param.
001:
0
#3 NUMERIC Param.
002:
10
When the stop key is pressed, the service mode is exited.
Figure 13-501
13-56
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
Service mode menu list
Characters in bold face show initial setting values.
Service data
#1 SSSW
(service software switch settings)
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
Error/copy management
Network connection condition setting
Echo countermeasure setting
Communication trouble countermeasure setting
Standard function (DIS signal) setting
Scanning condition setting
Closed network connection function setting
Closed network connection ID setting
Display indicator setting
Reserved
Reserved
1 page timer setting
Reserved
Standard paper size classification
Reserved
No recording paper indicator setting
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Report display function setting
Transmission function setting
Reserved
V.8, v.34 procedure setting
Reserved
SW50 Reserved
Figure 13-502
Note:
SW10, 11, 13, 15, 17-23, 27 and 29-50 are Reserved. Do not change these settings.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-57
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#2 MENU
(menu switch settings)
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
NL equalizer setting
ON
OFF
006:
DIAL
SERVICEMAN [1]
SERVICEMAN [2]
OFF
Phone line monitor setting
007:
8dBm
9dBm
10dBm
Output level setting
14dBm
15dBm
008:
3429
3200
3000
2800
2743
2400
V.34 modulation speed upper limit
009:
33.6
31.2
28.8
26.4
24.0
21.6
19.2
16.8
14.4
12.0
9.6
7.2
4.8
2.4
V.34 data speed upper limit
010:
020:
Items 10-20: Reserved
Figure 13-503
Note:
No. 01-04, 10-20 are Reserved. Do not change these settings.
13-58
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Range setting
#3 NUMERIC Param.
(numeric parameter settings)
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
1 to 99
2 to 9
1 to 99
1 to 60
1 to 60
0 to 20
Reserved
RTN signal output condition (1) setting
RTN signal output condition (2) setting
RTN signal output condition (3) setting
NCC pause time setting (before ID code)
NCC pause time setting (after ID code)
Reserved
Reserved
Direct mail prevention function: set number of digits of
telephone number to be checked
T0 timer
T1 timer
Reserved
T30 EOL timer
Reserved
Hooking Detection time setting
Reserved
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
0 to 9999
026:
027:
Reserved
(15 to 25) x 10 V.21 low-speed command preamble detection time
Reserved
028:
080:
0 to 9999
500 to 3000
0 to 999
Reserved
Figure 13-504
Caution:
No. 001, 007, 008, 012, 014, 016-026 and 028-080 are Reserved. Do not change the
settings.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-59
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#4A SPECIAL
#4B NCU
(NCU settings)
SW01
SW04
Data encoding method/ Canon original speed protocol setting
Completion tone setting
1. TONE / PULSE
2. DIAL TONE
3. 2nd DIAL TONE
4. BUSY TONE 0
5. BUSY TONE 1
6. REORDER TONE
7. MULTI
8. AUTO RX
9. CNG DETECT
10. RKEY
11. PBX DIAL TONE
12. PBX BUSY TONE
#4C ISDN
#5 TYPE
(type setting)
EUROPE, UK, SWEDEN, SWISS, AUSTRIA, DENMARK,
NORWAY, HOLLAND, BELGIUM, AUSTRALIA, FINLAND,
N.Z., ITALY, SPAIN, PORTUGAL, IRELAND, HONG KONG,
MALAYSIA, HUNGARY, SAF, CHINA, GERMAN, FRANCE,
SINGAPORE, CZECH, SLOVENIA
Figure 13-505
#4A SPECIAL
Do not change settings for items other than SW01 and SW04.
#4B NCU (NCU setting)
Do not change the settings.
#4C ISDN
Do not change the settings.
#5 TYPE
When the country version settings are programmed, the standard values for each
country are entered in the parameters for #1 SSSW – #4 NCU at one time.
13-60
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#6 SCANNER
(scanner function settings)
#7 PRINTER
1. Bit SW
2. SLICE
3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. Output Adjust
6. LUT 1 fno
7. LUT 2 adj
8. CCD
9. BOOK
10. MODEL
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
#1 SSSW
(printer function settings)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reduction. Cassette selection setting
Reduction setting
SW 07 to 20; Reserved
SW20
#2 NUMERIC Param
01: Printed image deletion range when
reception a long document image
02: Reserved
03: Reserved
04: Leading edge margin
05: Trailing edge margin
Items 06 to 30; Reserved
30:
#3 PRINT COUNT
#4 PRINTER RESET
YES= (*)
NO= (#)
Figure 13-506
Note:
#6 SCANNER (Scanner function settings)
The quality of scanned images may be adversely affected, depending on this setting.
8.CCDmay be changed when adjusting the image position, but do not adjust any
other item settings.
#7 PRINTER (Printer function settings)
SW01-04, 07-20, No. 02, 03, and 06-30 are Reserved. Do not change the settings.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-61
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Dial registration mode, user data memory
management initialization
User data (other than memory management), #1-#3
initialization
User data #6, #7 initialization
TEL
#8 CLEAR
(data initialization mode settings)
USER SW
SERVICE SW
NCU
ISDN
SERVICE DATA
COUNTER
REPORT
ALL
#4A, #4B initialization
#4C initialization
System dump list initialization
001: Number of printed pages input
002: Number of scanned pages input
Activity management report initialization
All data initialization
MAIN : image processor
PCB ROM
#9 ROM
(ROM management)
#10 CS SET
Version number display
Initializes mirror mount to position
set at time of shipping
(mirror mount initialization setting)
TEST MODE [1] to [7], [9]
Figure 13-507
13-62
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
D.
SSSW Default Setting
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
DENMARK
~
AUSTRIA
~
SWISS
~
SWEDEN
~
U.K.
~
#1 SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
EUROPE
SW50
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
6
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
#2 MENU
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-63
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
N.Z.
~
FINLAND
~
AUSTRALIA
~
BELGIUM
~
HOLLAND
~
#1 SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
SW30
NORWAY
SW50
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
12
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
13
3429
33.6
25Hz
#2 MENU
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
13-64
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
01000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
HONG KONG MALAYSIA
~
IRELAND
~
PORTUGAL
~
SPAIN
~
#1 SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
ITALY
SW50
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OFF
DIAL
6
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
#2 MENU
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-65
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
10000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
SINGAPORE
~
FRANCE
~
GERMAN
~
CHINA
~
SAF
~
#1 SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
HUNGARY
SW50
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
13
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
12
3429
33.6
25Hz
#2 MENU
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
13-66
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
00010000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
~
SLOVENIA
~
#1 SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
CZECH
SW50
00000000
00000000
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
OFF
DIAL
10
3429
33.6
25Hz
#2 MENU
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-67
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
EUROPE
U.K.
SWEDEN
SWISS
AUSTRIA
DENMARK
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
009:
010:
011:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
030:
051:
052:
053:
054:
055:
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
12
4
1
6
5500
3500
120
2
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
12
4
4
6
6000
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
12
4
4
6
8500
3500
120
2
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
75
0
250
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
0
0
0
0
0
#4A SPECIAL
SW01
SW04
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
#5 TYPE
EUROPE
U.K.
SWEDEN
SWISS
AUSTRIA
DENMARK
13-68
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
NORWAY
HOLLAND
BELGIUM
AUSTRALIA
FINLAND
N.Z.
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
009:
010:
011:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
030:
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
2
30
30
400
30
30
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
6000
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
2
100
0
300
100
0
300
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
12
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
2
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
4
20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01
SW04
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
#5 TYPE
NORWAY
HOLLAND
BELGIUM
AUSTRALIA
FINLAND
N.Z.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-69
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
ITALY
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
009:
010:
011:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
030:
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
30
30
400
30
30
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
15
3
6
5500
3500
120
4
150
0
300
40
10
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
1
6
5500
3500
120
4
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01
SW04
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
ITALY
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
#5 TYPE
13-70
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
HONG KONG MALAYSIA
HONG KONG MALAYSIA
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
HUNGARY
SAF
CHINA
GERMAN
FRANCE
SINGAPORE
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
009:
010:
011:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
030:
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
5
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
3500
3500
120
4
40
20
200
40
20
200
4
10
60
5
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
4500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
5
20
8
15
6
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
40
20
200
100
0
200
9
10
60
5
20
8
15
12
4
4
6
4000
3800
120
4
30
30
400
150
0
300
6
10
60
5
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
5
20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01
SW04
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
#5 TYPE
HUNGARY
SAF
CHINA
GERMAN
FRANCE
SINGAPORE
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-71
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
CZECH
SLOVENIA
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
009:
010:
011:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
030:
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
10
15
12
4
4
6
5500
3500
120
4
100
0
400
100
0
400
4
10
60
4
20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01
SW04
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
CZECH
SLOVENIA
#5 TYPE
13-72
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
#7 PRINTER
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
EUROPE
U.K.
SWEDEN
SWISS
AUSTRIA
DENMARK
00000000
00000000
00000101
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
027:
028:
029:
030:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-73
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
#7 PRINTER
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
027:
028:
029:
030:
13-74
NORWAY
HOLLAND
BELGIN
AUSTRALIA
FINLAND
N.Z.
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
#7 PRINTER
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
ITALY
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
HONGKONG
MALAYSIA
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000101
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000101
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
027:
028:
029:
030:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-75
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
#7 PRINTER
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
027:
028:
029:
030:
13-76
HUNGARY
SAF
CHINA
GERMAN
FRANCE
SINGAPORE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000101
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000101
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE
#7 PRINTER
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
CZECH
SLOVENIA
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
10000000
00000100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
4
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
011:
012:
013:
014:
015:
016:
017:
018:
019:
020:
021:
022:
023:
024:
025:
026:
027:
028:
029:
030:
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-77
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
E.
1.
Parameter settings
SSSW settings
Bi
Bi
t1
t0
t2
Bi
t3
Bi
t4
Bi
t5
Bi
t6
Bi
SW01
Bi
t7
The registration and setting items on this switch are composed of 8 bit switches.
The bit switches indicated on the display are as shown below. Each bit is set to 0 or 1.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 13-508
Information about the bit switches is displayed in the table below.
Indicates setting is 0.
Indicates setting is 1.
Indicates that this is
the initial value.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
Function
Service error code
Error dump list
Secret ID number when confidential
reception image is forwarded
according to confirmation of memory
contents
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Date & Time setting restriction
Restrict user settings
Output
Output
Do not input
0
Not output
Not output
Input
Setting restricted Setting possible
Setting possible Setting restricted
Table 13-501
13-78
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW01: Error, copy management
SW
No.
01
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Error code for service engineer
Output
Do not output
1
Error dump list
Output
Do not output
2
Secret code function when confidential reception image is forwarded by to the memory management function
Do not input
Input
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Date & Time setting restriction
Setting restricted Setting possible
7
Restrict user settings
Setting possible Setting restricted
Table 13-502
[Bit 0]
Service error code output selection. When “output” is selected, the service error code is
indicated on the display and in the report.
[Bit 1]
Error dump list output selection. When “output” is selected, an error dump list is
attached to the error transmission report and the reception results report at the time of
the error, and output.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to input the secret code when confidential reception images are
forwarded by using the memory reference button, or when the images are deleted or
printed. When “do not input” is selected, the confidential reception image will be forwarded, deleted or printed, without the secret code being input.
[Bit 6]
When “Setting restricted” is selected, certain items can not be set by the user, depending on the country setting.
When “Setting possible” is selected, all items are user selectable, regardless of the
country type setting.
[Bit 7]
When “setting restricted” is selected, certain items can not be set by the user, depending on the country setting.
When “setting possible” is selected, all items are user selectable, regardless of the
country type setting.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-79
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW02: Network connection condition settings
SW
No.
02
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
Startup when there is faulty memory clear
report output
1
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Restrict
0
Do not restrict
Table 13-503
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to go into standby when the memory clear list is not output when
the machine is powered on, after an error occurs. After the screen data are cleared by
selecting “Prohibit”, turn on the power and clear the error. Then the machine will go into
standby after the memory clear report is output.
Reference:
Actions when “Prohibit” is selected
a) Error occurrence: will not receive at this time even if a transmission arrives.
b) After error clearing: memory clear report is output automatically. When an error
occurs during output, return to action a).
13-80
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW03: Echo correction settings
SW
No.
03
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Reserved
1
High-speed transmission echo protect tone
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Transmission mode: international transmission (1) Yes
No
5
Transmission mode: international transmission (2),
Yes
or international transmission (3)
No
6
Transmission mode
International
International
transmission (3) transmission (2)
7
Tonal signal before CED signal transmission
Send
Send
Do not send
Do not respond
Table 13-504
[Bit 1]
Selects whether or not to transmit a echo protect tone with the high-speed V.29 (baud
rate is 9600bps or 7200 bps) modem signal.
When errors occur frequently during transmission due to telephone line conditions,
select echo protect tone “send”. When “send” is selected, an unmodulated carrier is
transmitted as a synchronising signal before sending the image at 200ms intervals.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at transmission due to telephone line conditions:
##100, ##104, ##281, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-81
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[Bit 4,5,6]
Selects transmission mode; international transmission (1), international transmission (2)
or international transmission (3).
When errors occur frequently due to echo when sending transmissions overseas, set
the transmission mode by dial registration or service software switch.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at transmission due to echo
##005, ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##210, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750,
##760, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794
Settings at dial registration (user level):
When registering the 1-touch dial or coded speed dial transmission mode, set to
international transmission (1). If the error is not resolved, set to international transmission (2) and international transmission (3), in that order. Transmission modes set for 1touch dial or coded speed dial override service software switch settings.
When transmission modes are selected by these switches, international transmission mode can also be set using transmission via the numeric key pad. Refer to the
chart below for settings for transmission modes.
Bit
Transmission mode
International transmission (1)
International transmission (2)
International transmission (3)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
*
*
*
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
0
0
0
International transmission (1): ignores the first DIS signal sent by the reception
machine.
International transmission (2): Sends a 1850Hz tonal signal at the time of DIS signal
transmission.
International transmission (2): Sends a 1650Hz tonal signal at the time of DIS signal
transmission.
Table 13-505
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to send a 1080Hz tonal signal before sending the CED signal.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at reception
#005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790
13-82
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW04 communications trouble remedy setting
SW
No.
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Reserved
1
CI signal frequency check
2
Number of protocol signal’s final flag sequences 2
1
3
Reception mode after CFR signal transmission
High-speed
/ low-speed
4
Time for which low-speed signal is ignored after
1500ms
CFR signal transmission
700ms
5
CI signal frequency check when PBX is set
Check
Do not check
6
CNG signal at manual transmission
Do not send
Send
7
CED signal at manual reception
Do not send
Send
Check
High-speed
Do not check
04
Table 13-506
[Bit 1]
Select whether or not to check the CI signal frequency upon automatic reception.
If “check” is selected, the upper and lower limits of the CI signal frequency will be
checked when a transmission arrives. The fax will switch to automatic reception only
when both signals are within the standard range.
[Bit2]
You can select the number of final flag sequences for the protocol signal (transmission
speed is 300 bps).
When the procedure signal sent out by this unit is not properly received by the destination machine, set the number to 2.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur upon transmission
##100, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760,
##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780, ##783,
##785, ##788
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-83
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[Bit 3]
Selects the reception mode after CFR signal transmission.
When errors due to the telephone line condition occur frequently in reception, select
“high-speed” reception mode and set the user data ECM reception setting off.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur in reception due to telephone line trouble
##107, ##114, ##201
Change Bit 4 before changing this bit. If errors continue to occur, change this bit.
When “high-speed” is selected, only high-speed (image) signals will be received after
CFR signal transmission.
[Bit 4]
Selects the length of time to ignore a low-speed signals after CFR signal transmission.
When the condition of the telephone line is not good and it is difficult to receive image
signals, set to 1500 ms.
[Bit 5]
Selects whether or not to perform CI signal frequency check during PSTN/PBX in user
data set to PBX. (This switch is only compatible with 230V machines.)
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to transmit a CNG signal in manual transmission.
When errors occur frequently, check whether “send” CNG signal is selected.
[Bit7]
Selects whether or not to transmit a CED signal in manual reception.
When the other party’s machine does not start transmission when manual reception is
being performed, select “send”.
13-84
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW05 Standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW
No.
05
Bit
No.
Function
Bit setting
1
0
0
Reserved
1
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Bit transmission of DIS signal bit 33 and later
Prohibit
Do not prohibit
4
Cut paper declaration by DIS signal
A4/B4 size
Any size
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Table 13-507
[Bit 3]
Bit transmission of DIS signal bit 33 and later.
Note:
When “prohibit” is selected, it becomes impossible to use superfine reception and the
memory box function of other companies' machines.
[Bit 4]
Selects that the paper declared by the DIS signal is cut paper. When receiving long documents, select A4/B4 size to have the document divided by the transmitting machine.
MEMO:
There are cases in which long documents are not divided, depending on the type of
machine which is transmitting.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-85
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW06: Reading condition settings
SW
No.
06
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
0
Reserved
1
Reserved
2
Document length restriction
3
Reserved
4
Document scanning width
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Halftone and superfine
1
0
Do not restriction 1 meter or less
Letter
A4 Prohibit
Allow
Prohibit
Table 13-508
[Bit 2]
Selects the document length limit.
[Bit 4]
Selects the document scanning width. When “letter” is selected, letter size documents
are read at letter width (214 mm).
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not superfine mode can be set when an image quality mode other
than TEXT mode is selected.
13-86
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW07: closed connection function setting
SW
No.
07
Bit
No.
Function
0
Setting prohibited
1
Setting prohibited
2
Setting prohibited
3
Setting prohibited
4
Setting prohibited
5
Setting prohibited
6
Closed network connection reception
7
Closed network connection transmission
Bit setting
1
0
Yes
No
Õ
No
Table 13-509
The closed network connection function is a function for communication only with
specified faxes. This function is only available for specified faxes with machines that
have the closed network connection function.
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to use closed network connection reception function reception.
When you wish to receive a fax only from a specified machine, select “yes” and set the
same ID as the transmitting machine. The ID setting is set by the SW08 bit switch 8.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to use closed network connection transmission function transmission.
When you wish to send a fax only to a specified machine, select “yes” and set the same
ID as the reception machine.
The ID setting is set by the SW08 bit switch 8.
If the ID does not match that of the reception machine, an error code (#039) will be displayed.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-87
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW08: closed connection ID settingClosed network connection ID bit 7
SW
No.
08
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
Closed network connection ID bit 0
1
Closed network connection ID bit 1
2
Closed network connection ID bit 2
3
Closed network connection ID bit 3
4
Closed network connection ID bit 4
5
Closed network connection ID bit 5
6
Closed network connection ID bit 6
7
Closed network connection ID bit 7
0
Table 13-510
When using closed network connection function, set these switches to the same ID
as the other party’s machine.
13-88
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW09: Display indicator settings
SW
No.
09
Bit
No.
Function
0
Reserved
1
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Consecutive polling reception
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Bit setting
1
0
Yes
No
Table 13-511
[Bit 5]
Selects whether or not to perform consecutive polling reception.
Yes: calls until the stop key is pressed.
No: consecutive polling reception is not performed.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-89
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW12: Page timer settings
SW
No.
Bit
No.
0
1
2
3
12
4
5
Bit setting
Function
1
0
Page time out interval when transmitting (none
when set to image mode)
1
0
1
0
Page time out interval when transmitting (when
set to image mode and A4 document mode)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Page time out interval when receiving
6
Reserved
7
Separate transmission and reception page timer
Set
settings
Do not set
Table 13-512
These switches can set the page timer. When transmission or reception takes more
than 32 minutes on this machine, communications are stopped. When the timer is set to
other than 32 minutes, refer to the following page and set the appropriate time.
When “do not set” is selected for Bit 7, the one page time out interval is controlled by
Bit 0 and Bit 0, regardless of the communication mode.
13-90
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission/reception time out interval
Bit
Time out interval
8 minutes
16 minutes
32 minutes
64 minutes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
Time out interval when transmitting (no image mode setting)
Bit
Time out interval
8 minutes
16 minutes
32 minutes
64 minutes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Time out interval when transmitting (image mode AA)
Bit
Time out interval
8 minutes
16 minutes
32 minutes
64 minutes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Time out interval when receiving
Bit
Time out interval
8 minutes
16 minutes
32 minutes
64 minutes
Table 13-513
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-91
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW14: Standard paper size classification
SW
No.
Bit
No.
0
1
14
Bit setting
Function
Standard paper size classification
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
1
0
1
0
1
0
Table 13-514
[Bit0. Bit1]
The combination of Bit0 and Bit1 allows the standard paper size classification to be
changed.
Bit0
0
1
0
1
Bit1
0
1
1
0
Standard paper size classification
AB series
INCH series
A series
By setting this switch, the document paper size display and setting, and automatic identification, etc., are used to judge the standard paper size.
13-92
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW16: Add paper indicator setting
SW
No.
25
Bit
No.
Function
Bit setting
1
0
0
Add paper indicator judgment conditions
No paper in
one location
No paper of
the same size
1
Multi-feeder at time of add paper judgment
Do not include Include in
in judgment
judgment
conditions
conditions
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Table 13-515
[Bit 0]
Selects add paper judgment conditions.
No paper in one location: all cassettes are subject to judgment
No paper of same size: When there is paper remaining of the same size as the paper
that was used up, the add paper indicator does not display.
[Bit 1]
Selects user mode>01 data registration>05 printer settings>06 name stack size>02 on.
Selects whether or not to include the multi-feeder in the add paper judgment conditions
when set to the size of paper used in the multi-feeder.
Effective when SW16 Bit 0 is 0.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-93
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW25: Report display function settings
SW
No.
25
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
Transmission telephone numbers displayed in
the report
Other party’s
number
1
Other party abbreviations displayed in the report Leave
2
Reserved
3
Message language switch
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Display
0
Calling party’s
number
Clear
Do not display
Table 13-516
[Bit 0]
Selects transmitting telephone numbers displayed in the report after transmission has
ended.
Calling party’s number:
displays the Calling side’s telephone number in
the report.
Destination party’s telephone number: displays the telephone number (CSI signal data)
sent from the destination party’s machine in the
report.
MEMO:
Even if calling party’s number is selected, when the call is not dialed by one-touch
dialling or speed dialling, the telephone number (CSI data signal) sent by the other
party’s machine is displayed in the report.
[Bit 1]
Selects other party’s abbreviation displayed in the report after transmission has ended.
Registration abbreviation:
displays the other party’s abbreviation entered in 1touch dialling and coded speed dialling in the report.
Other party’s machine’s abbreviation: displays the abbreviation (NSF signal data) sent
from the other party’s machine in the report.
MEMO:
Even if “Registration abbreviation” is selected, when the other party’s abbreviation is
not entered in the Calling side’s 1-touch or coded speed dialling, the abbreviation
(NSF signal data) sent from the other party’s machine is displayed in the report.
[Bit 3]
When “display” is selected, “06 message language” is displayed in the user mode’s system settings.
13-94
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW26: Transmission function settings
SW
No.
26
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Forced direct transmission function
1
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Destination at the time broadcast transmission is
One destination All destinations
interrupted
7
Error report for time of transmission interruption Do not output
Set
Do not set
Output
Table 13-517
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to set the forced direct transmission function.
Set: All transmissions other than broadcast transmissions are sent directly.
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to interrupt communications to all destinations when broadcast
transmission is interrupted.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to output an error report when the stop key is pressed to interrupt transmission.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-95
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#1 SSSW-SW28: V.8/V.34 protocol settings
SW
No.
28
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Calling side’s V.8 protocol
No
Yes
1
Called side’s V.8 protocol
No
Yes
2
Calling side’s V.8 late start
No
Yes
3
Called side’s V.8 late start
No
Yes
4
Fall back from V.34 receiving side
Prohibit
Do not prohibit
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Table 13-518
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol.
“No”: Even when V.8 protocol is received from receiving side, V.8 protocol is disabled,
protocol starts from V.21.
[Bit 1]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol in reception.
“No”: V.8 protocol is disabled. Starts from V.21 protocol.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol when an ANSam signal cannot be recognized
from the reception side and V.8 protocol is declared by the reception side in the DIS signal.
“Yes”: sends a CI signal in response to the called side’s DIS signal, then uses V.8 protocol.
“No”: does not send a CI signal in response to the called side’s DIS signal. Uses V.21
protocol.
When sending a manual transmission, V.8 late start is disabled regardless of this setting.
[Bit 3]
Selects whether or not to declare V.8 in the DIS signal when the ANSam signal can not
be detected by the transmitting machine.
“Yes”: declares V.8 protocol in the DIS signal. Uses V.8 protocol after a CI signal is sent
by the transmitting machine.
“No”: does not declare V.8 protocol in the DIS signal. Uses V.21 protocol.
When sending a manual transmission, V.8 late start is disabled regardless of this setting.
[Bit 4]
Selects whether or not to prohibit fall back from a V.34 reception machine.
Prohibit: Do not fall back from the receiving side.
13-96
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Menu switch settings (#2 MENU)
No.
005
006
Function
Selection range
NL equalizer
Telephone line monitor
007
008
009
Transmission level (ATT)
V.43 modulation speed upper limit
V.34 data speed upper limit
ON/OFF
DIAL/
SERVICEMAN
[1],[2]/OFF
8 to 15
2400 to 3429baud
2.4 to 33.6Kbps
Table 13-519
[Bit 005]
Selects NL equalizer ON/OFF.
Select NL equalizer ON when errors occur frequently due to telephone line conditions
during communications.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur during transmission due to telephone line conditions
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281 ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760,
##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
Error codes for errors which occur during reception due to telephone line conditions
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
[Bit 006]
Selects telephone line monitor setting.
DIAL:
telephone line monitoring sound is output from the speaker from
initiation of communications until DIS signal.
SERVICEMAN [1]/[2]: telephone line monitoring sound is output from the speaker from
initiation of communications until end of communications.
OFF:
Monitor sound is not output.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-97
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[Bit 007]
Sets the transmission level (ATT).
When errors occur frequently due to telephone line conditions during communications,
raise the transmission level.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur during transmission,due to telephone line conditions
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281 ##282, ##283, ## 284, ##750,
##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765, ##767, ##769,
##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787,
##789
Error codes for errors which occur during receiving, due to telephone line conditions
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
[Bit 008]
Selects the modulation speed (baud rate) occurring in the V.34 primary channel.
[Bit 009]
Selects the data transmission speed upper limit occurring in the V.34 primary channel
from the 2.4K-33.6Kbps range, at 2400bps intervals.
13-98
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
No.
002
003
004
005
006
009
010
011
015
027
Numeric settings by type (#3 NUMERIC Param.)
Function
RTN signal transmission condition (1)
RTN signal transmission condition (2)
RTN signal transmission condition (3)
NCC pause time setting (before ID CODE)
NCC pause time setting (after ID CODE)
Compare number of digits in transmitter telephone number
and receiver telephone number
T0 timer
T1 timer
Hooking detection interval
V.21 low-speed/command preamble detection time
Selection range
1 to 99 (%)
2 to 99 (times)
1 to 99 (lines)
1 to 60 seconds
1 to 60 seconds
1 to 20 (digits)
1 to 9999 (10ms)
1 to 9999 (10ms)
1 to 999 (× 10ms)
15 × 25 (× 10ms)
Table 13-520
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-99
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[No.02, 03, 04]
Sets RTN signal transmission conditions. When errors occur frequently in receiving due
to RTN signal output errors, raise these parameters and ease the RTN signal transmission conditions.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur in reception due to RTN signal output error:
##104, ##107, ##114, ##201
RTN signal output condition (1) : the proportion of number of error lines compared to
the total number of lines per one page of received
images.
RTN signal output condition (2) : the burst error* reference value**
RTN signal output condition (3) : the number of errors not meeting the burst error
reference value
* burst error
: transmission error occurring over consecutive lines
** Reference value
: When set to 15, this will recognize a burst error
when a transmission error occurs for 15 consecutive
lines.
When one of these conditions are detected during
receiving of an image signal, a RTN signal is sent
out after the transmitting machine’s procedure signal has been received. When these parameters are
raised, the RTN signal becomes difficult to send
out.
[No. 05]
Sets the pause time that is automatically entered between the access code and ID code
when dialing on a NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
[No. 06]
Sets the pause time that is automatically entered between the ID code and other party’s
telephone number when dialing on a NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
[No. 09]
Selects the number of digits to compare when comparing telephone numbers entered
into this machine’s one-touch and speed dialing functions and the other party’s TSI,
when the designated telephone number is restricted by the memory box function, or
direct mail prevention function setting.
Change this parameter before entering telephone numbers.
13-100
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[No. 10]
Sets the line connection identifier time. When errors occur frequently during communications due to telephone line conditions, raise this parameter.
MEMO:
“The waiting time from the end of transmission of the selection signal to detection of
a significant signal at time of transmission” which was previously set by parameter 10
as T1 timer, has, by the recommendation of ITU-T, become T0 timer. Therefore for
this machine, parameter 10 has been changed to T0 timer and the default time out
interval has been changed from 35 seconds to 55 seconds.
Furthermore, the transmitting party’s T1 timer (the waiting time from when CED, V21
flag or ANSam’s significant signal is detected until the next significant signal is
detected) is fixed at 35 seconds.
[No. 11]
Sets the receiver’s T1 timer (the waiting time from the start of DIS transmission to the
receipt of a significant signal).
When errors occur frequently during receiving due to telephone line connection conditions, raise this parameter.
[No. 13]
Sets the maximum time allowed for receiving per one line of image data when receiving
image data. When the image data receiving time per line is long, increase this parameter’s setting and increase the maximum time allowed for receiving.
[No. 15]
Sets hooking detection time. When changing the hooking timing, adjust this parameter.
When it is set to 50, it recognizes hooking longer than 500ms as being “on hook”.
[No. 27]
Use it to change the period of time spent to detect the header flag of a V.21 low-speed
command. Decrease it so that it is as close to 15 (150ms) as possible if detection fails
because of such effects (as echoes as when communicating with an overseas party).
On the other hand, increase it so that it is as close to 25 (250ms) as possible is a tone
signal or the like is wrongly identified as the header flag of a low-speed command.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-101
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
Special settings (#4A SPECIAL)
#4A SPECIAL-SW01: Data encoding methods/Canon original abbreviated protocol
settings
SW
No.
Bit
No.
01
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
MR, MMR encoding methods
Prohibit
Do not prohibit
1
MMR encoding method
Prohibit
Do not prohibit
2
Hyper control
No
Yes
3
Setting prohibited
4
Setting prohibited
5
Setting prohibited
6
Setting prohibited
7
Setting prohibited
Table 13-521
[Bit 0]
Sets the data encoding method for communication. When “prohibit” is selected, encoding is limited to MH encoding.
[Bit 1]
Sets the data encoding method for communication. When “prohibit” is selected, encoding is limited to MH or MR encoding. When faulty images result from MMR encoding,
select “prohibit.” This bit is effective when Bit 0 is set to “do not prohibit.”
MEMO:
The encoding methods are as shown below, depending on the combination of Bit 0
and Bit 1 settings.
Bit1
0
0
1
1
Bit0
0
1
0
1
Selected encoding method
MMR, MR or MH
MR or MH
MH
MH
Table 13-522
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to perform hyper control at time of communications.
13-102
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#4A SPECIAL-SW04: Completion tone settings
SW
No.
04
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Setting prohibited
1
Completion tone when receiving from memory
Ring
Do not ring
2
Receiving print completion tone
Ring
Do not ring
3
Setting prohibited
4
Setting prohibited
5
Setting prohibited
6
Setting prohibited
7
Setting prohibited
Table 13-523
[Bit 1]
Sets whether or not to ring the completion tone when receiving is finished when receiving from memory.
[Bit 2]
Sets whether or not to ring the completion tone when received image printing is finished.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-103
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.
Country type setting (#5 TYPE)
When country type setting is performed, the standard values for each item’s parameters in #1 SSSW to #4 NCU are entered at one time.
6.
Document scanning function setting ( #6 SCANNER)
When this item’s setting is changed, the quality of scanned images may deteriorate.
Do not change this setting other than to adjust “8 CCD” when adjusting image positioning.
13-104
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
7.
a.
Printer parameter settings (#7 PRINTER)
#1 SSSW setting
#7 PRINTER- #1 SSSW-SW05 (reduction, cassette selection setting)
SW
No.
05
Bit
No.
Bit setting
Function
1
0
0
Priority on LTR
Yes
No
1
Priority on LGL
Yes
No
2
Report output when report paper has run out
Do not output
Cassette output
from other than the
specified cassette
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
No
Yes
5
Reduction and printing on LTR
6
Cassette when report cassette is specified
Set
Do not set
7
Sub-scanning priority record
Set
Do not set
Table 13-524
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LTRR over LTRR or LGL when data which
may be printed on either by division is received
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LGL over A4R or LTRR when data which may
be printed on either by division is received
The order of priority will be as follows according to the bit 0 and 1 settings:
Bit 1
Bit 0
Order of priority
0
0
A4R → LTRR → LGL
0
1
LTRR → A4R → LGL
1
0
LGL → LTRR → A4R
1
1
LTRR → LGL → A4R
If sub scanning is given priority, the order will be LTRR → A4R → LGL even when bit 1
and 0 are set to 0.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to output a report in a cassette other than the one selected when
a cassette is specified for report output by user data but there is no paper in the specified cassette.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-105
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
[Bit 5]
Use it to specify whether to reduce and print on LTRR paper.
If printing on non-LTRR paper without reduction is desired for a long-size page, be sure
to select “No.”
[Bit 6]
When a report cassette has been specified, a report can only be output from the specified cassette.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to set sub-scanning priority record.
“Set”:
When B4 and A4R size paper are set and an A4 length* image is
received, use B4 paper to print.
“Do not set”: When B5 horizontal and A4R paper are set and a B4 sized image is
received, divide the image to B5 horizontal paper size and print.
* An image whose length is less than B4 size, an image which cannot be reduced and
printed on A4R paper.
13-106
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#7 PRINTER-#1 SSSW-SW06 (reduction setting)
SW
No.
06
Bit
No.
Function
0
Reduction when image is divided
1
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Bit setting
1
Prohibit
0
Do not prohibit
Table 13-525
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to reduce the received image when it is possible to make a divided print when the length of the document received has been reduced to the maximum
reduction rate (70%).
Prohibit:
Divide the document and print on the following page. (original size)
For example, when a document the length of 2.5 A4R pages is
received, the document will be divided onto three A4R pages and printed. At that time, the image will be output at the original size.
Do not prohibit: Reduce the image and print within the page when a divided print is
made.
For example, when a document the length of 2.5 A4R pages is
received, the image is reduced 70% and the document is printed out on
two A4R size pages.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-107
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
b.
No.
01
04
05
14
#2 NUMERIC Param. (Numeric parameter settings)
Function
Selection range
Deletion range of printed image when a long length image is
received
0 to 9999
Leading edge margin
0 to 9999
Trailing edge margin 1
0 to 9999
Trailing edge margin 2
0 to 9999
Table 13-526
[No. 1]
Sets the deleted image range when a long length image is received.
When you wish to keep the received image’s trailing edge even when receiving images
of a length that is over the effective record length, lower this parameter and reduce the
deletion range.
MEMO:
When a document whose length exceeds the effective recording length is received, if
the image length is within a range of 14 mm* of the effective recording length, this
range will be deleted and the image printed. When the image length is more the
14mm beyond the effective recording length, the received image will be reduced to a
maximum of 75%** and printed on one page. However, when the document exceeds
the effective recording length even after reduction, the image will not be reduced, but
will be divided and printed.
* Initial setting value
** When the user mode’s image reduction mode is set to automatic.
[No. 4]
Sets the effective recording length’s leading edge margin.
[No. 5]
Sets the effective recording length’s trailing edge margin.
[No. 14]
Sets the trailing edge margin. The length of the margin changes according to the paper
length.
A5 Setting value × (148.5/297)
A3 Setting value × (420/297)
A4R Setting value × (297/210)
The combined value of Bit 5 and Bit 14’s settings become the trailing edge margin.
c.
#3 PRINT COUNT
Displays the number of pages printed.
d.
#4 PRINT RESET
Resets the printer.
13-108
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.
Initialization of setting values (#8 CLEAR)
Selecting the setting items below initializes the data by each item..
Clearing setting items and numeric for the parameters will set the items to values set
at factory shipping.
Item
TEL
USER SW
SERVICE SW
NCU
SERVICE DATA
COUNTER
REPORT
ALL
Data that are initialized
Data entered by TEL Entry. One-touch dial, speed dial, group dial entries.
Data in user data memory management.
Data entered in user data and in SSSW#1-#3. Data in the user data memory management will not be cleared. Accumulated image data in the memory are cleared.
User data and data in SSSW#1-#3, #6, #7
SSSW#4 data
System dump list data
Number of pages read/activity management numbers
Activity management report data
All setting and registration data
Table 13-527
Warning:
When replacing the image processor PCB, check the counter before replacing. Input
the counter value after replacing.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-109
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Control memory data are deleted or initialized according to the items listed below by
using Service Mode #8 CLEAR.
Before performing this procedure, be sure to print a backup data list.
Operation name
TEL
USER SW
SERVICE SW
NCU
ISDN
SERVICE DATA
REPORT
COUNTER
ALL
Contents
Data entered in User data 2. TEL # REGISTRATION
Data that are entered in User data 1. DATA REGISTRATION and data
entered in Service mode settings #1-#3. However, the data in the
FILE SETTINGS of User data 1. DATA REGISTRATION are not deleted or initialized.
User data, data in service mode items #6, #7
Data in service mode settings #4A, #4B
Data in service mode setting #4C
Management data system dump list data
Management data activity management report data
Print counter data from management data system dump
All user data, service mode setting items, management data and
image data except service mode setting #5 and the print counter
from management data system dump
Table 13-528
9.
ROM information display (#9 ROM)
Shows the image processor PCB’s ROM DIMM management information (version
no., checksum, etc.) on the display.
10. CS SET (mirror mount initialization setting)
When this item is set, the mirror mount moves to the position set when shipped.
13-110
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
F.
1.
Test Mode (TEST MODE)
Overview
The test mode runs according to the menu items shown on the display.
The test mode items are divided into 8 blocks.
D-RAM test <1:DRAM>
Checks if data reading and writing to the D-RAM is operating normally.
CCD test <2: CCD TEST>
Used when correcting the variations in sensitivity of the CCD’s photosensitive cells.
PRINT test <3:PRINT>
Prints 8 patterns within the printing area.
MODEM NCU test <4:MODEM NCU>
Performs relay operations test, modem DTMF, tonal signal transmission and receiving tests.
AGING test <5:AGING TEST>
Illuminates the scanning lamp and drives the ADF document transport motor in fine
mode. The printer continuously prints a diagonal line pattern in fine mode and characters in normal density.
FACULTY test <6:FACULTY TEST>
Used when checking operations of the microswitcher, sensor, speaker and ADF
functions.
DATA SET <7:DATA SET>
Do not touch. This mode is for factory use only.
BOOK test <8:BOOK TEST>
Operates at the speed for the scanning transmission image quality LED.
Warning:
Do not use the DATA SET mode. If you enter the DATA SET mode, the registration
data will be changed automatically.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-111
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Test Mode menu
To operate the test mode, press the enter/set key then the # key and select the SERVICE MODE. Then use the up/down shift keys to select TEST MODE and depress the
set key.
After finishing the TEST MODE, press the stop key, then the clear key.
TEST MODE [1] - [7], [9]
E40 :
1: D-RAM
[1] - - - [2]
2: CCD TEST
[1] - - - [8]
3: PRINT
[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#]
1: D-RAM
******
7168K
1: D-RAM
******
7168K
3: PRINT
3-0: AMI PATERN
3: PRINT 31: WHITE
3: PRINT
3-2: BLACK
3: PRINT
3-3: STRIPES
3: PRINT
3-4: CHECKERS
3: PRINT
3-5: CHECKERS-2
3: PRINT
3-6: ENDURANCE
3: PRINT
3-7: BLACK/WHITE
3: PRINT
3-8: BIAS
3: PRINT
3-9: CHECKERS-3
3: PRINT
3-*: PRINTING AREA
3: PRINT
3-#: CRG TEST
Figure 13-509
13-112
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4: MODEM NCU
[1] - - - [8]
4-1. RELAY
[1] - - - [2]
RELAY 1
[0] - - - [5]
RELAY 1 100000
1-0: CML
ON
RELAY 1 010000
1-1: P
ON
RELAY 1 001000
1-2: S
ON
RELAY 1 000100
1-3: H
ON
RELAY 1 000010
1-4: D
ON
RELAY 1 000001
1-5: R
ON
RELAY 2
[0] - - - [8]
RELAY 2 100000000
2-0: CMP
ON
RELAY 2 010000000
2-1: NZ
ON
RELAY 2 001000000
2-2: CI1
ON
RELAY 2 000100000
2-3: CI2
ON
RELAY 2 000010000
2-4: AST
ON
RELAY 2 000001000
2-5: C1
ON
RELAY 2 000000100
2-6: C2
ON
RELAY 2 000000010
2-7: NOR
ON
RELAY 2 000000001
2-8: DC
ON
Figure 13-510
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-113
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4-4: G3 Tx
12000 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
14400 bps
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#]
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
0:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
1:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
2:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
3:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
4:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
5:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
6:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
7:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
8:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
9:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
* :
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
#:
Figure 13-511
13-114
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4-2: FREQ
[1] - - - [7]
4-2: FREQ
462 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1100 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1300 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1500 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1650 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1850 Hz
4-2: FREQ
2100 Hz
4-4: G3 Tx
[0] - - - [8]
4-4: G3 Tx
300 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
2400 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
4800 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
9600 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC9600 bps
Figure 13-512
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-115
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4-6. TONE Rx 000
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
[0] --- [5] UP-DOWN
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 3429 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 3200 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 3000 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 2800 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 2743 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST
Baud: 2400 Speed: 33.6
Figure 13-513
13-116
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
5: AGING
TEST
6 : FACUL T Y TEST
[1] - - - [9], [#]
6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx
4800 bps
6-2: REGISTRA TION
REGISTRA TION SW OFF
DS of DES on DOC A4
CRG on
DCVS on
6 -3 : SENSOR
[1] - - - [8]
HPS on RES on BCVS of
NDFS of DLS0 of DLS1 of
CT1 on A4 CT2 of B4
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
ML T on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
0:01 2:01 3:01
8:01 10:07 11:0B
12:01
16:01
21:38
35:01
13:70
17:01
5:01
15:31
18:20
22:04
33:01
39:01 100:01
BSCT of BBOC [NONE]
6-4: ADF
P.0001/0234
6 -5 : ST AMP
[1] - - - [2]
6 -5 : ST AMP
5 point
6 -5 : ST AMP
endless
6-6: SPEAKER
FRE Q : [1 ] VO L : [2]
6 -6 : SPEAKER
FREQ
TEST
6-6: SPEAKER
VOL [ * ]:MI N [#]:MAX
6 -7 : OPERA TIO N PANEL
6-9: LINE DETECT
[1] - - - [3]
C1=OFF 0 Hz
HOOK=ON FC=OFF
6-#: ESS TEST
CNG DETECT
CNG=OFF OFF
Figure 13-514
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-117
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
7: DA TA SET
SET=[0 ] NO=[STOP]
8: BOOK TEST
[1] - - - [6]
8 -1 : BOO K FEE D TEST
P.0000/0000
8-2: BOOK POS ADJ
P.0000/0000
8-3:
HP ADJ
P.0000/0000
8-4: BOOK POS RST
8 -5 : BOO K STE P SET
00:
01
01:
10:
Figure 13-515
13-118
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
D-RAM test <1: DRAM>
Performs a write/read check on data in all areas of the D-RAM. When 8MB expansion memory has been installed, also checks the expansion memory area.
When an error occurs during checking, the test will be aborted and an error message will be indicated on the display.
Caution:
When a D-RAM test is performed, the image data saved in the image memory are
cleared. Therefore, output the images before performing the test when there are
saved images.
Running
1:D-RAM
7168K
......*******
7168K: D-RAM’s total memory volume (in bytes)
* : indicates write test completed bank.
. : indicates read test completed bank.
When an error occurs
Normal completion
1:D-RAM
complete
Error display
15360K
(no error)
WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC
ADR= BF840201
Reopens when
start key is
pressed
WRT: Written data
RD: Read data
ADR: Address
Error completion
1:D-RAM
complete
15360K
(error)
Figure 13-516
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-119
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
CCD test <2: CCD TEST>
When you press 2 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu, the CCD TEST
is selected. When 8 on the numeric key pad is pressed during the running of this test,
shading adjustment is performed.
(See page 13-9.)
5.
PRINT test <3: PRINT>
a) Test pattern printing mode
When you press 3 on the numeric key pad, the PRINT TEST is selected.
There are two service-use print patterns. They are shown below. Do not use the
other print patterns, as they are for factory and development use.
• 3-2: BLACK: output when 2 on the numeric key pad is pressed.
• 3-6: ENDURANCE: output when 6 on the numeric key pad is pressed.
To cancel the test print, press the stop key.
Check the print pattern to make sure
there is no image reduction, stretching,
soiling or black stripes.
Check the print pattern to make sure
there are no white stripes or unevenness.
Figure 13-517
13-120
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Remarks:
When the test print switch (SW401) on the sensor PCB is pressed, the print patterns
shown below are output.
By outputting these test prints, you can conduct a print check with the scanning
assembly Operation panel assembly installed.
Precision screwdriver
Print pattern
Figure 13-518
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Figure 13-519
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-121
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.
MODEM NCU test <4: MODEM NCU>
Runs transmission and reception tests for the MODEM and NCU. For the modem
test, checks whether the modem’s transmission signal is being properly transmitted by
checking the signal sound from the speaker. Also checks whether the received tonal signal and DTMF signal were properly detected by the modem. The test ends when the
stop key is pressed.
Type
Relay test
key pad.
Frequency test
Outline
Turn the selected relay on and off using the numeric
G3 signal transmission test
DTMF signal reception test
Tonal signal reception test
V.34 G3 signal transmission test
Output the tonal signal from the modem through the
telephone line connection terminal and the speaker.
Output the G3 signal from the modem through the
telephone line connection terminal and the speaker.
Output the DTMF signal from the modem through the
telephone line connection terminal and the speaker.
Put the specific frequency received from the telephone line connection terminal and the DTMF signal
through the modem and display whether or not they
are detected. The received signal is output from the
speaker.
Output the V.34G3 signal from the modem through
the telephone line connection terminal and the
speaker.
a) Relay test
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
relay test is selected.
The NCU relays are operated by the numeric key pad.
Caution:
ON/OFF on the display indicator is displayed for the relay operation signal transmission by operation of the numeric key pad. Therefore, it is not possible the verify that a
single relay unit is damaged by looking at the display.
RELAY 1
1-1 : P
1: RELAY ON
2: RELAY OFF
010000
ON
0
1
RELAY
CML P
Numeric key 0
1
0
S
2
0
H
3
0
D
4
0
R
5
Figure 13-520
13-122
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
b) Frequency test
When 2 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
frequency test is selected.
This test uses the telephone line connection terminal and the speaker to output the
frequency signals shown below from the modem. Changes in frequency are made using
the numeric key pad.
Numeric key pad
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Frequency
462Hz
1100Hz
1300Hz
1500Hz
1650Hz
1850Hz
2100Hz
Remarks:
Frequency and each frequency’s output level conform to the service mode’s output
level setting.
c) G3 signal transmission test
When 4 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the G3
signal transmission test is selected. This test uses the telephone line connection terminal and the speaker to output the G3 signals shown below from the modem. Change the
output speed using the numeric key pad and then check the signals.
Numeric key pad
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output speed
300bps
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
TC7200bps
TC9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
Remarks:
The output level of each signal conforms to the service mode settings.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-123
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
d) DTMF signal output test
When 5 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
DTMF signal transmission test is selected. This test uses the telephone line connection
terminal and the speaker to output the DTMF signals from the modem shown below.
The DTMF signal corresponds to the key pressed on the numeric key pad.
Remarks:
The output level of each signal conforms to the service mode settings.
e) Tonal, DTMF signal reception test
When 6 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
tonal signal and DTMF signal reception 0 test is selected. This test checks whether the
tonal signal and DTMF signal received from the telephone line connection terminal was
detected.
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx
0
0
000
0
Changes from 0 to 1 when a 462 ± 25Hz signal is detected
Changes from 0 to 1 when a 1100 ± 30Hz signal is detected
Changes from 0 to 1 when a 2100 ± 25Hz signal is detected
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx
000
1234567890
The DTMF signals received on the display’s second line are displayed in order from the right.
Figure 13-521
13-124
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
f)
V.34 G3 signal transmission test
When 8 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
v.34 G3 transmission test is selected. In this test, when the start key is pressed, the V.24
G3 transmission signal from the modem, shown below, is output using the telephone
line connection terminal and the speaker. The modulation rate (baud rate) is changed
using the numeric key pad and the output speed is changed using the shift keys (up and
down arrows?).
Numeric key pad Modulation rate
0
3429baud
1
3200baud
2
3000baud
3
2800baud
4
2743baud
5
2400baud
Shift key
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Output speed
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
16800bps
19200bps
21600bps
24000bps
26400bps
28800bps
31200bps
33600bps
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-125
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.
AGING test <5: AGING TEST>
When 5 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the AGING
TEST is selected.
This test illuminates the scanning lamp and drives the ADF’s document feed motor
at the speed used for fine mode. Also, the printer prints out a vertical stripe pattern in
fine mode.
The AGING TEST stops when the stop key is pressed.
7.
FACULTY test <6: FACULTY TEST>
When 6 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the FACULTY
TEST is selected.
This test tests the following functions.
a) G3 signal transmission test: Outputs a 4800bps G3 signal to the telephone line
and speaker.
b) Slide switch test:
Tests operation of the Operation panel’s slide switches.
c) Sensor test:
Tests operation of each sensor.
d) ADF test:
Tests ADF operation
e) Stamp test:
Completion stamp operation test
f) Speaker test:
Speaker operation test
g) Operation panel test:
Operation panel key operation test
h) Line signal reception test: NCU board’s signal sensor and frequency counter operation test
i) ESS test:
ESS (energy saver function) operation verification test
a) G3 signal transmission test <6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx>
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the G3 signal transmission test is selected.
This test outputs a 4800bps G3 signal to the telephone line connection terminal and
the speaker.
b) Slide switch test <6-2: REGISTRATION>
When 2 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the slide
switch test is selected.
When the slide switches on the Operation panel are turned on and off, ON and OFF
are displayed on the display.
The slide switches are shown as REGISTRATION SW on the display.
13-126
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
c) Sensor test <6-3: SENSOR>
c-1) Sensor test
This is a mode which uses the display to check the condition of this machine’s sensors.
When 3 on the numeric key pad is pressed in the FACULTY TEST menu, the sensor
test is selected.
The display indicator indicates when the sensor being tested is turned on and off.
Also, the LBP status is shown on the display to check printer error information.
Refer to page 13-12 for details concerning the sensor test.
6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
Press 1 on the numeric key pad.
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: document sensor (PS801): on/document, of/no document
DES: document leading edge sensor (PS805): on/document, of/no document
DOC: document width sensor (PS851, PS852): displays the width of the
document depending on the combination of the two sensors ON/OFF status
CRG: toner cartridge message: on/toner cartridge, of/no toner cartridge
DCVS: pick-up sensor: on/no paper detected (at stand-by means the lower right
cover is closed)
of/paper is detected (at stand-by means the lower right
cover is open)
Press 2 on the numeric key pad
HPS on RES on BCVS of
NDFS of DLS0 of DLS1 of
HPS: scanner home position sensor: on/scanner is in the home position
of/scanner is not in the home position
RES: reserved
BCVS: copyboard cover open/close sensor: on/cover is open, of/cover is closed
NDFS: document length sensor 1 (PS801): on/document, of/no document
DLS0: document length sensor 2 (PS803); on/document, of/no document
DLS1: Reserved
Figure 13-522
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-127
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Press 3 on the numeric key pad
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
CT1: main body cassette add paper sensor (PS305); on/paper available, of/add paper
main body cassette paper size detection switch
CT2: first level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
first level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT3: second level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
second level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT4: third level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
third level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
Press 4 on the numeric key pad.
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT: multifeeder add paper sensor (PS501): on/paper available, of/add paper
TN: add toner sensor: on/toner available, of/add toner
RS: reserved
JAM: jam detection status: on/jam detected, of/no jam detected
Press 5 on the numeric key pad.
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01
8:01 10:07 11:0B
Press 6 on the numeric key pad.
12:01 13:70 15:31
16:01 17:01 18:10
Displays printer status.
(see page 13-129)
Press 7 on the numeric key pad.
21:38 22:07 33:01
35:01 39:01 100:01
Figure 13-523
13-128
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
c-2) Printer status
This mode is used to identify the area which is out of order when a printer malfunction indicator is displayed.
To display the status, press 5,6,7 on the numeric key pad when the sensor test
screen displays shown below are displayed. An example of the screen display is shown
below and the meaning of the display is described.
6-3 : SENSOR
[1] - - - [7]
Press 5 on the numeric key pad.
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01
8:01 10:04 11:04
Press 6 on the numeric key pad.
12:01 13:70 15:31
16:01 17:01 18:10
Status display screen
(example)
Press 7 on the numeric key pad.
21:38 22:07 33:01
35:01 39:01 100:01
The status used by this machine are status no. 8, 35, and 39, only.
(Displayed in the shaded boxes
above.)
Figure 13-524
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-129
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
How to read the printer status screen
Printer status is displayed as a hexadecimal number.
This is converted to a binary number and then the area which is out of order is
detected.
Below is an explanation of how to read the screen.
Status Number
3: Misprint status in detail
8: Call service man status
35: Feeder assembly trouble status in detail
39: Fixing assembly trouble status in detail
Status information (upper 4 bits)
Upper 4 bits display 0000.
Status information (lower 4 bits)
Lower four bits display 0010.
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01
8:02 10:07 11:0B
When status 8’s status information (upper four bits) displays 0 and (lower 4 bits) 2,
as shown above, if the bit pattern is fixed according to the conversion chart below,
at 0000 0010, bit 1 becomes 1.
Status 8’s bit 1 is a status which indicates a fixing assembly problem, and indicates
the cause of the printer’s poor condition is the fixing assembly.
(Upper 4 bits)
Display
indicator
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
(Lower 4 bits)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Display
indicator
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Figure 13-525
13-130
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer status information list
The details of each status number (3,8,25,29) are displayed in charts from the next
page. Read the charts as shown below.
Shows the status when
each status bit is 0.
Shows the status when
each status bit is 1.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning
Parity bit (odd number)
Fixing assembly trouble
Scanner unit trouble
Fan motor trouble
Reserved
Feeder assembly trouble
Reserved
Reserved
1
0
Out of order
Out of order
Out of order
Normal
Normal
Normal
Out of order
Normal
Figure 13-526
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-131
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Status 3 (misprint status in detail)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning
Parity bit (odd number)
Reserved
Reserved
Paper size error
Paper feeding fault
Reserved
BD signal trouble
Reserved
1
0
Abnormal
Abnormal
Normal
Normal
Out of order
Normal
Table 13-529
[Bit 3]
When the registration clutch is turned off then on again and the recording paper leading
edge sensor is ON, this becomes 1.
[Bit 4]
When the set or specified paper size is judged to be different from the paper feeding
into the printer, this becomes 1.
[Bit 6]
When there is a fault in the laser scanning mechanism and the BD signal is not output
at the prescribed timing (cycle and signal width), this becomes 1.
13-132
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Status 8 (call service man status)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning
Parity bit (odd size)
Fixing assembly trouble
Scanner unit trouble
Fan motor trouble
Reserved
Feeder assembly trouble
Reserved
Reserved
1
0
Out of order
Out of order
Out of order
Normal
Normal
Normal
Out of order
Normal
Table 13-530
[Bit 1]
When trouble is detected in the fixing assembly’s fixing heater and temperature control
thermistor, this becomes 1.
[Bit2]
When trouble is detected in the laser scanner motor, laser unit or BD, this becomes 1.
[Bit 3]
When a fan trouble signal is detected more than 60 times within 200ms, this becomes 1.
[Bit 5]
When the main motor is out of order, this becomes 1.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-133
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Status 35 (feeding assembly trouble status in detail)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning
Parity bit (odd number)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Main motor trouble
0
1
0
Out of order
Normal
Table 13-531
[Bit 6]
When the ready signal does not come continuously at 0.1 seconds after the main motor
drive starts, this becomes 1.
When the ready signal is continuous at 0.1 seconds after the main motor drive has
stopped, this becomes 1.
13-134
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Status 39 (fixing assembly trouble status in detail)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning
Parity bit (odd number)
Reserved
Drive circuit trouble
0
Abnormally high temperature detected
Abnormally low temperature detected
Faulty startup detected
0
1
0
Out of order
Normal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Table 13-532
[Bit 2]
When power is not supplied to the fixing assembly, this becomes 1.
[Bit 4]
When the temperature of the fixing assembly is more than 20(C higher than the standard temperature for more than 30 seconds continuously, this becomes 1.
[Bit 5]
When the temperature of the fixing assembly is more than 10(C lower than the standard
temperature for more than 30 seconds continuously, this becomes 1.
[Bit 6]
When the thermistor is down, this becomes 1.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-135
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
d) ADF test <6-4: ADF>
This is the ADF operation checking mode.
When 4 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the ADF
test is selected.
When the document is set in the document inlet guide and the start key is pressed,
the document is fed at a speed matching the selected resolution. The number on the
display counter advances with each page.
It is possible to set up to 50 sheets of A4 paper, 20 sheets of A3/B4 paper.
6-4 : ADF
P.0001/0025
P.0001/0025
Total number of pages during test
Number of documents fed
Figure 13-527
e) Stamp test <6-5: STAMP>
This is the stamp operation checking mode.
When 5 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the stamp
test is selected.
The stamp test has the following two menus.
• Test menu 1
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the Stamp TEST menu is pressed, test menu 1 is
selected. When a document is set in the ADF is this condition, the document is fed
20mm past the scanning position and is stamped 5 times at 10mm intervals from that
position, then delivered.
• Test menu 2
When 2 on the numeric key pad in the Stamp TEST menu is pressed, test menu 2 is
selected. When a document is set in the ADF is this condition, the document is fed
20mm past the scanning position and is stamped continuously at 10mm intervals from
that position until the document edge sensor (DES) goes off.
13-136
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
6-5 : STAMP
[1] - - - [2]
Press 1 on the numeric key pad
6-5 :
STAMP
Press 2 on the numeric key pad
6-5 :
STAMP
Figure 13-528
f)
Speaker test <6-6: SPEAKER>
This mode is for checking the speaker operation.
When 6 on the numeric keypad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the speaker
test is selected. In this test, a tonal signal is output from the speaker from 200Hz to
5kHz at 100Hz intervals. The sound volume is also switched. Check that the signal
sound is coming out of the speaker.
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ:[1]
VOL:[2]
Press 2 on the
numeric key pad
Press 1 on the
numeric key pad
6-6: SPEAKER
VOL[*]:MIN [#]:MAX
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ TEST
Press the start key to change
the output frequency
It is possible to adjust the
volume of the signal sound to
the minimum by pressing *, to
the maximum by pressing #
and one level at a time by
pressing the start key
Figure 13-529
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-137
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
g) Operation panel test <6-7: OPERATION PANEL>
This is a mode for checking the Operation panel operation.
When 7 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the OPERATION PANEL test menu is selected. The functions that can be checked in this mode
are described below.
• Display test
When the start key on the OPERATION PANEL test menu is pressed, the display
test is selected. In this test, “Perform LCD density adjustment” is shown on the display.
When the start key is pressed again, all black, all white, border and checker patterns
are displayed in order.
• LED lamp test
When the start key is pressed after the display test has finished, the LED lamp test
is selected.
When the start key is pressed, all the lamps on the Operation panel are illuminated.
Operation button test
When the start key is pressed after the LED lamp test has finished, the key test is
selected.
Press the keys for the characters shown on the display, if the display goes out they
are normal. The correspondence between the characters and buttons are shown in the
table below.
When all the LEDs of both the completion stamp key and the direct transmission key
characters have been illuminated, the display will go out.
Characters
1 to #
R
C
O
D
E (Right)
E (Left)
L
M
/
F
a
Operation key
Numeric key pad
Redial key
Copy key
Hook key
Coded dial key
PRINT/SCAN key
Set key
Clear key
Fax monitor key
Program key
FAX key
Copy special features key
Characters
u
%
S
c
U
V
W
X
s
r
P
!
Operation key
Data registration key
Direct Tx key
Stamp key
Return key
Screen selection key F1
Screen selection key F2
Screen selection key F3
Screen selection key F4
Collate key
Reset key
Pause key
Energy saver key
Table 13-533
13-138
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
When all the characters displayed have disappeared, then the one-touch dial key
test starts. Characters from a-z and A-Z are displayed. The display from characters a-B
corresponds to the one-touch dial keys 01-28. When the one-touch dial keys are
pressed, the characters corresponding to them disappear from the display.
6-7:OPERATION PANEL
Display test
Press Start key
ADJUST LCD CONTRAST
Character display
Press start key
All black display
Press start key
All white display
Press start key
Border display
Press start key
Checker pattern display
Press start key
6-7:OPERATION PANEL
LED TEST
LED lamp test
All LED lamps illuminate
Press start key
123456789*0# UVWX
cEL %SM/DTRO !CEFsaru
Operation
key pad test
When the key corresponding to a character
is pressed, that character goes out.
Press start key
abcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzAB
When a one-touch dial key is pressed,
the corresponding letter disappears.
The test ends when the stop key is pressed.
Figure 13-530
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-139
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
h) Line signal reception test <6-9: LINE DETECT>
When 9 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the LINE
DETECT test is selected. In test menu 1, the C1, FC and external telephone’s fax are
detected, and if signals are being properly detected by the NCU board, that is also
detected.
h-1) Test menu 1
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, the Test
menu 1 is selected. In this test the display will go from ON to OFF when C1, FC and
external telephone OFF HOOK are detected from the telephone line connection terminal.
h-2) Test menu 3
When 3 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, test menu 3
is selected. In this test the display will go from OFF to ON when CNG is detected from
the telephone line connection terminal.
h-3) Test menu 4
When 4 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, test menu 4
is selected. In this test the outgoing message can be checked. By selecting 0 or 1 on the
numeric key pad, 2 types of outgoing messages are output from the telephone line and
the speaker.
i)
ESS test <6-#: ESS TEST>
When the # key on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the
ESS (energy saver function) test is run. Running this test puts this machine into the ESS
mode and turns off all the LEDs except for the ESS key on the operation panel. The
ESS mode is canceled by the following operations.
• When the ESS key is pressed
• When a document is set in the ADF
• When a fax arrives
• When the machine is off the hook
• When it is time to output a report
• When it becomes time to send a delayed call
13-140
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.
BOOK scanning test <8: BOOK TEST>
When 8 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the BOOK
test is selected.
In this test the scanning lamp is illuminated and it is checked whether the scanning
lamp moves at the speed corresponding to the scanning transmission image quality setting.
Caution:
This test is for factory use.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-141
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
VI. REPORTS
A.
1.
User reports
Reports output manually
The reports shown below are types output by user operation.
Report types
1-touch list 1
Coded dial list 1
Group dial list
1-touch (Detail)
the
Coded (Detail)
User data
Confidential mail box list
Document memory list
RX Memory box list
Activity report
Operation
To output the reports, after pressing the Report key,
use the up and down arrow shift keys ▲▼ to select
the desired report, and then press Set.
To output the telephone number list, after pressing
Report key, select SPEED DIAL LIST, and press Set.
Then, select the desired telephone number list, and
press Set once more.
Table 13-601
13-142
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Reports output automatically
The reports shown below are output automatically according to user mode settings.
Report types
Tx report
Rx report
Confidential Rx report
Memory box report
Activity report
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Setting
Automatically output according to the output settings
in the user data’s report settings menu.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-143
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
a) Memory clear list
Figure 13-601
TX/RX NO.:
MODE:
DESTINATION TEL/ID:
PGS.:
SET. TIME:
ST. TIME:
SENDER NAME:
13-144
4 digit display
transmission, polling transmission, timer transmission,
relay reception, confidential reception, memory reception,
memory box transmission, memory box reception
one-touch dial, speed dial numbers
total number of pages
date and time displayed in 24 hour mode
total starting time (displayed in 24 hour units)
Name of sender attached at time of transmission department code 4 digits (only when DAC SET up to ON).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Service report
Service mode setting status and previous communications history reports and
reports of detailed error information are output in the service mode setting. The types of
service reports are shown below.
Report types
Sistem data list
(error codes and dump lists
included)
Error transmission report
(error codes and dump lists
included)
Reception results report
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Operation
Press the report key when in the service mode. Select
the lists you would like to output and press the set
key.
Set the output in the user mode’s report settings
menu (it is possible to set whether error codes and
dump lists are included by selection of service data #1
SSSW-SW01 Bit 0 and Bit 1)
Set the output in the user mode’s report settings
menu (it is possible to set whether error codes and
dump lists are included by selection of service data #1
SSSW-SW01 Bit 0 and Bit 1)
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-145
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
a) System data list
Displays the service software switch and service parameter settings status.
Figure 13-602
13-146
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-603
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-147
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-604
13-148
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-605
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-149
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-606
13-150
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-607
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-151
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-608
13-152
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-609
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-153
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-610
13-154
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-611
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-155
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-612
13-156
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 13-613
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-157
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
b) System dump list
Displays previous communications status and error communications history.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Figure 13-614
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
*8:
TX: Total number of pages transmitted
RX: Total number of pages received
Number of pages sent and received by document size
Number of pages sent and received by modem speed
Number of pages sent and received by mode (standard/fine/superfine/ultra fine)
Number of pages sent and received by encoding method
Times sent and received by mode
Pages printed/total number of pages printed. pages read/total number of pages
read
*9: Number of errors by error code
[Display example]
##280
1
7
3
0
0
Number of
##0280 errors
13-158
Number of
##0281 errors
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Number of
##0282 errors
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
Displays information about the three most recent communication errors.
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
✽6
✽7
✽8
✽9
✽10
✽11
✽12
✽13
✽14
✽15
Figure 13-615
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-159
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
*1: Service error code
*2: START TIME: Date and time (displays in 24 hour mode)
*3: OTHER PARTY: Telephone number sent from the other party
*4: MAKER CODE: Manufacturer code
*5: MACHINE CODE: Code by machine type
*6: V.8 signal code contents received from the other party’s machine
*7: Symbol speed used by primary channel
*8: Data speed used by primary channel
*9: 0 (fixed)
*10: Code output by modem when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*11: Modem transmission status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*12: Modem reception status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*13: Received DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*14: Transmitted DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*15: RX= Received protocol signal
TX= Transmitted protocol signal
13-160
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
c) Error transmission report (for service use)
Includes service error codes and error dump lists to the error transmission report.
To include service error codes and error dump lists, set service mode SSSW-SW01.
When the transmission results report is set to include transmitted images in the user
mode’s report setting, a part of the first page of the transmitted image is appended
when the document is received into memory.
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
✽6
✽7
✽8
✽9
✽10
✽11
✽12
✽13
✽14
✽15
Figure 13-616
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-161
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
*1: Service error code
*2: START TIME: Date and time (displays in 24 hour mode)
*3: OTHER PARTY: Telephone number sent from the other party
*4: MAKER CODE: Manufacturer code
*5: MACHINE CODE: Code by machine type
*6: V.8 signal code contents received from the other party’s machine
*7: Symbol speed used by primary channel
*8: Data speed used by primary channel
*9: 0 (fixed)
*10: Code output by modem when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*11: Modem transmission status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*12: Modem reception status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*13: Received DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*14: Transmitted DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*15: RX= Received protocol signal
TX= Transmitted protocol signal
13-162
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
VII. USER ERRORS
#0001 [TX] Document jam
Cause
• Document became jammed.
• Document’s size or thickness is outside the
standards.
• Internal mechanism fault.
Countermeasure
• Remove the document and try sending
again.
(1)
Send after making a copy by book
scanning or use book scanning transmission?
(2)
Send thin documents by book scanning
transmission.
Refer to “Document jam detection” in the ADF
service manual.
#0003 [TX/RX] 1 page copy/send receive time over
Cause
• 1 page document length is more than 1 m
or takes more than the prescribed time (32
minutes) to send/copy.
• Takes more than the prescribed time (32
minutes) to receive.
• Internal mechanism fault.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1)
Make a copy by book scanning. Divide
the document and send/copy.
(2)
Increase the page timer value using #1
SSSW-SW12 Bit 0 and Bit 1.
(1)
Have the sender divide the document
and send in parts.
(2)
Contact the sender and have the cause
investigated.
(3)
Increase the page timer value using #1
SSSW-SW12 Bit 0 and Bit 1.
See “Document jam detection” in the ADF
service manual.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-163
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0005 [TX/RX] Initial identifier (T0/T1) time over
Cause
• TEL LINE TYPE setting mistake.
• Time until connection with the other party’s
machine is long.
• Other party’s machine does not respond.
• A significant signal cannot be detected after
DIS signal transmission is completed.
• Other party’s machine’s communication
mode does not match.
(1) Other party’s machine mis-operates due
to echo at transmission.
(2) Mis-operation due to echo at reception.
Countermeasure
• Set TEL LINE TYPE correctly.
(1) Add a long pause when registering an
autodial entry and delay the timer start.
(2) Increase the T0 timer by #3 NUMERIC
Param. 010 so it won’t time out.
• Contact the other party and have the cause
investigated.
• Increase the T1 timer by #3 NUMERIC
Param. 011 so it won’t time out.
• No countermeasure possible because the
communications mode is a specification of
the machine.
• See #1 SSSW SW03 for echo countermeasures.
#0008 [TX] Password rejected at polling transmission
Cause
• Other party’s password and your machine’s
password do not match.
Countermeasure
(1) Contact the other party and synchronize
the passwords.
(2) Make a DAT recording of the communication protocol and analyze it.
#0009 [RX] Jam/Add paper
Cause
• Paper is jammed.
• Paper has run out.
• Internal mechanism fault.
13-164
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Remove the paper jam.
• Set more paper.
(1) Check the Add paper sensor, pick-up
sensor, registration sensor, leading edge
sensor and delivery sensor flags.
(2) Check by TEST MODE/FACULTY
TEST/[3]SENSOR TEST.
(3) Check according to this manual’s
Feeding fault countermeasures.
(4) Replace the DC controller circuit.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0011 [RX] Polling reception error
Cause
• No document is set in the other party’s
machine.
• The document was not set properly at the
time of transmission, so polling reception
occurred.
Countermeasure
• Have the other party set the document
properly.
• Set the document properly and send it.
#0012 [TX] Other party’s machine is out of paper
Cause
• Other party’s machine is out of paper.
Countermeasure
• Have the other party set paper.
#0018 [TX/RX] Automatic calling error
Cause
• TEL LINE TYPE set incorrectly.
• Telephone line connection time is long.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s
machine’s busy signal.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s
machine’s not being connected or not having power.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s
machine having no recording paper.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Set TEL LINE TYPE correctly.
(1) Add a long pause when registering an
autodial entry and delay the timer start.
(2) Increase the T0 timer by #3 NUMERIC
Param. 010 so it won’t time out.
• Call again.
• Contact the operator of the other party’s
machine and have the cause investigated.
• Have the other party set recording paper in
the machine.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-165
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0021 [RX] DCN received at time of reception
Cause
• Password does not match.
Countermeasure
• Contact the other party and synchronize the
passwords.
#0022 [TX] Can not call
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s telephone
number is not registered in autodial at the
time of broadcast transmission or multipolling reception.
Countermeasure
• Enter the other party’s telephone number in
autodial.
#0025 [TX/RX] Autodial is set incorrectly
Cause
• At the time of autodialing, confidential and
relay directives are set.
Countermeasure
• Set autodial correctly.
#0033 [TX] Confidential transmission not possible
Cause
• The other party’s machine does not have a
confidential mailbox function.
Countermeasure
• Perform regular transmission since confidential transmission is not possible.
#0034 [TX] Cannot transmit to other party’s machine’s confidential box
Cause
• The designated confidential mail box does
not exist in the other party’s machine.
• The other party’s machine’s memory is full.
13-166
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Confirm the other party’s machine’s confidential box number and send a confidential
transmission.
• Check the amount of free memory in the
other party’s machine and have them output
any memory reception documents.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0035 [TX] Relay originating transmission not possible
Cause
• No relay function in the other party’s
machine.
Countermeasure
• Transmit direct by sequential broadcast
transmission since relay transmission is not
possible.
#0036 [TX] Relay directive transmission not possible
Cause
• The specified relay box does not exist in the
other party’s machine.
• The relay originating user’s telephone number is not entered in the relaying machine’s
one-touch dial or speed dial.
• The relaying machine’s memory is full.
Countermeasure
• Confirm the other party’s machine’s relay
box and send a relay originating transmission.
• Have the relay originating user’s telephone
number entered in the relaying machine’s
one-touch dial or coded dial.
• Contact the relay station and have them
clear unnecessary image data.
#0037 [RX] Image memory exceeded at time of reception
Cause
• Excessive document information at time of
reception.
Countermeasure
• Have the other party clear unnecessary
image data, and resend.
#0059 [TX] The number dialed and the number connected to (CSI) do not match
Cause
• The user’s telephone number on the receiving side is not registered.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Contact the other party and have them register the user’s telephone number.
• Set so that the user data’s destination is not
checked.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-167
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0080 [TX] The other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended sub-address reception
function
Cause
• DIS bit 49 received from the other party’s
machine becomes 0.
Countermeasure
• Send to another fax machine which has that
function.
• When the other party’s machine is of a different type, use normal G3 transmission.
#0081 [TX] Other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended password reception function
Cause
• DIS bit 50 received from the other party’s
machine becomes 0.
Countermeasure
• Send to another fax machine which has that
function.
• When the other party’s machine is of a different type, use normal G3 transmission.
#0082 [TX] Other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended selective polling reception
function
Cause
• DIS bit 47 received from the other party’s
machine becomes 0.
Countermeasure
• Send to another fax machine which has that
function.
• When the other party’s machine is of a different type, have the destination set their
machine so it can send polling transmissions, then perform polling reception.
#0102 [TX] Password/sub-address sent at time of transmission, but DCN received
Cause
• Password/sub-address not set in the other
party’s machine.
• The other party’s machine’s memory is full.
13-168
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Contact the other party and have them set
the password/sub-address.
• Contact the other party and have them
clear some memory.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
#0995 [TX] Memory transmission reservation canceled
Cause
• The user intentionally canceled the memory
transmission reservation.
Countermeasure
• Resend.
[TX] DATA ERROR displayed
Cause
• Checksum error. Displayed upon image
processor PCB replacement, SRAM fault,
and back up battery replacement.
Countermeasure
• Press the set key.
Caution:
When DATA ERROR is displayed, the set key must be pressed for recovery to take
place.
However, when the set key is pressed, the user data will be erased. Therefore, before
pressing the set key, check with the user.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-169
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
VIII. SERVICE ERRORS
• G3 mode error codes
## 0100 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded at time of
transmission
Cause
• (After Q signal is output after the image signal)
The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
the image signal or Q signal.
• (After TCF is before after the image signal)
The output level is low and the other party’s
machine can not properly receive the signal.
• (After TCF is output before the image signal)
The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
13-170
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• (After Q signal is output after the image signal)
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal or Q signal.
(2) Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
(3) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005 ,so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or Q signal.
(4) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal using #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit
1.
• (After TCF is output before the image signal)
Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or Q signal.
• (After TCF is output before the image signal)
(1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
(2) When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
(3) When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0101 [TX/RX] Modem speed does not match other party’s machine
Cause
• (At time of transmission)
Modem speed does not match that of the
other party’s machine.
• (At time of transmission)
Speed does not the other party’s machine
in fall back.
• (At time of reception)
Modem speed does not match that of the
other party’s machine.
Countermeasure
• (At time of transmission)
No countermeasure is possible because
modem speed is a specification of the
machine.
• (At time of transmission)
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive TCF.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive TCF.
(3) When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
(4) When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
• (At time of reception)
No countermeasure is possible because
modem speed is a specification of the
machine.
##0102 [TX] Fall back not possible at time of transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor and TCF is not
properly transmitted.
(1)
(2)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive TCF.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive TCF.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party's machine will not
receive echoes.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-171
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0103 [RX] EOL can not be detected for 5 seconds during reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the image
signal can not be properly received.
(1)
(2)
(3)
• Malfunction due to CFR echo.
(1)
(2)
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the image signal.
Have the other party lower the other
machine’s transmission start speed.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the transmitted
CFR echo is not received.
##0104 [TX] RTN or PIN received at time of transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the image
signal can not be properly received by the
other party’s machine.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
13-172
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the image signal.
Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
Have the other party ease the RTN transmission conditions for their machine so
that RTN will not be transmitted by the
other party’s machine.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the image signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0106 [RX] Protocol signal can not be received for 6 seconds in protocol signal standby during reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the protocol
signal can not be properly received by other
party’s machine.
• The line condition is poor and the image
signal can not be properly received by the
other party’s machine.
• Malfunction due to echo.
Countermeasure
• Have the other party raise the output level
so the protocol signal can be properly
received.
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the signal.
(1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures
(2) Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the transmitted
CFR echo is not received.
##0107 [RX] Fall back not possible for the transmitting machine during reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After a 2400 bit/s
signal is received, the signal from the other
party’s machine is not properly received.
(1)
(2)
(3)
• Malfunction due to echo.
(1)
(2)
Countermeasure
Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the other party’s
machine’s signal is properly received.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the TCF.
Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
#3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
is not output.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the transmitted
signal’s echo is not received.
##0109 [TX] Signals other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR and CRP are received and the limit for
the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after DCS output during transmission
Cause
• Protocol signal abnormality.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Record the Communication protocol on DAT
and request it to be analyzed by the
Technical Center.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-173
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0111 [TX/RX] Memory error
Cause
• Data error occurs due to noise during printing output of data stored in image memory.
• Mis-dialing was attempted due to noise.
(The telephone number pointer for printing/display does not match the pointer for
dialing.)
Countermeasure
• Output all data, then clear all data and
reregister the data.
• Replace the modem board.
##0114 [RX] RTN is output at time of reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the image
signal can not be properly received from the
other party’s machine.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
• Malfunction due to CFR echo.
(1)
(2)
Countermeasure
Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the image signal can be
properly received.
Have the other party’s machine’s transmission start speed lowered.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the image signal.
Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
#3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
is not output.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the output
CFR echo is not received.
##0200 [RX] Carrier can not be detected for 5 seconds during image reception during reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the image
signal can not be properly received.
(1)
(2)
• Time limit is exceeded because the training
signal can not be received due to CFR
echo.
13-174
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
(1)
(2)
Countermeasure
Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the image signal can be
properly received.
Have the other party’s machine’s transmission start speed lowered.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the output
CFR echo is not received.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0201 [TX/RX] DCN reception by other than normal binary protocol
Cause
• The other party’s machine is not capable of
reception. (No paper)
• User’s telephone number is not registered.
(When the other party’s machine is a Ricoh
3000L)
• Password does not match for polling reception.
• Document is not set for polling transmission.
• Reception was attempted but there is no paper.
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
the protocol signal.
• Malfunction due to echo.
• Image signal or Q signal can not be
received. The other party’s machine has
exceeded the limit for number of protocol
signal re-transmissions.
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s transmitting machine can not fall
back.
Countermeasure
• Have the other party’s machine set so that it
can receive. (Set paper)
• Register the user’s telephone number.
• When the other party’s machine is the
same model, contact the other party and
synchronize the passwords. When the other
party’s machine is made by another manufacturer, contact the other party and have
them set the machine so that is can perform
polling transmission.
• Set the document and have the other
party’s machine call again.
• Set paper.
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the protocol signal.
(1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures
(2) Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the output
echo is not received.
(1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the other party’s
machine’s signal is properly received.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the signal.
(3) Have the other party’s machine’s transmission start speed lowered.
(1) Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
#3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
is not output.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the signal is properly
received.
##0224 [TX/RX] Trouble occurs in the protocol signal during G3 communications
Cause
• Protocol signal fault.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Record the communication protocol on DAT
and analyze it.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-175
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##226 [TX/RX] System error (main program error)
Cause
• CPU malfunctioned due to noise.
Countermeasure
• Turn the power off then on.
##229 [RX] Memory reception due to recording system lock
Cause
• Unknown.
Countermeasure
• Press the start key and print the image.
##0232 [TX] ENCODE control unit malfunction
Cause
• ENCODE control’s UPI operation did not
end normally.
Countermeasure
• Replace the image processor PCB.
##0237 [RX] DECODE control unit malfunction
Cause
• DECODE control’s UPI operation did not
end normally.
Countermeasure
• Replace image processor PCB.
##0238 [RX] PRINT control unit malfunction
Cause
• PRINT control’s UPI operation did not end
normally.
13-176
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0261 [TX/RX] System error occurred between modem and gate array
Cause
• Internal unit fault (When RS became 1, CS
did not become 1.)
Countermeasure
• Replace the modem PCB.
##0280 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during transmission
Cause
• Output level is low. After TCF output the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the appropriate signal.
• Other party’s machine malfunctioned due to
echo.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the appropriate signal.
(1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
(2) When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
(3) When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
(4) Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
##0281 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After EOP output
the appropriate signal can not be received
because the image signal or EOP signal is
not being properly transmitted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal or EOP signal.
Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or EOP signal.
Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-177
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
## 0282 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during
transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After EOM output
the appropriate signal can not be received
because the image signal or EOM signal is
not being properly transmitted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal or EOM signal.
Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or EOM signal.
Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
##0283 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After MPS output
the appropriate signal can not be received
because the image signal or MPS signal is
not being properly transmitted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
13-178
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal or MPS signal.
Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or MPS signal.
Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0284 [TX] TCF output malfunction, DCN received during transmission
Cause
• The other party’s machine can not receive.
(no paper)
• User’s telephone number is not registered.
(When the other party’s machine is a Ricoh
3000L)
• The other party’s machine can not receive.
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
• A relay origination was issued to the other
party’s machine, but the other party’s
machine is in the midst of a relay broadcast.
Countermeasure
• Contact the other party and have the
machine set so it can receive.
• Register the user’s telephone number.
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can receive.
(1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
(2) When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
(3) When calling from the numeric key pad,
press the start button after you have
heard the other party’s first DIS.
(4) Have the other party raise the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
• Wait and resend at another time.
##0285 [TX] DCN received after EOP output at time of transmission
Cause
• Stop key is pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Resend.
##0286 [TX] DCN received after EOM output at time of transmission
Cause
• Stop key is pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Resend.
##0287 [TX] DCN received after MPS output at time of transmission
Cause
• Stop key is pressed during communications.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Resend.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-179
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0288 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after EOP output at time of
transmission
Cause
• Protocol signal abnormality.
Countermeasure
• Record the communication procedure
sound on DAT and analyze it.
##0289 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after EOM output at time of
transmission
Cause
• Protocol signal abnormality.
Countermeasure
• Record the communication procedure
sound on DAT and analyze it.
##0290 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after MPS output at time of
transmission
Cause
• Protocol signal abnormality.
Countermeasure
• Record the communication procedure
sound on DAT and analyze it.
##0322 [RX] Fixing assembly failure
Cause
• Internal unit fault.
13-180
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1) Check if the fixing assembly is properly
installed in the printer unit.
(2) Remove the fixing assembly and check
the resistance values in the fixing assembly connector terminals.
When room temperature is 20°C
J161 (AC side)
between 1P and 3P: 18Ω ± 7%
between 2P and 3P: 18Ω ± 7%
J161 (DC side)
between 1P and 2P: approx. 1755Ω
When the resistance values are off,
replace the fixing assembly.
(3) Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0323 [RX] Abnormal nBD signal output in the laser scanner unit
Cause
• Internal unit fault. (laser light intensity does
not meet the specification)
• Internal unit fault. (abnormal nBD signal
timing)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Countermeasure
Check the connection of the cable
between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
Replace the laser scanner unit.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Check the connection of the cable
between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
Replace the laser scanner unit.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
##0324 [RX] Abnormal number of laser scanner motor revolutions
Cause
• Internal unit fault.
Countermeasure
(1) Check the connection of the cable
between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
(2) Replace the laser scanner unit.
(3) Replace the DC controller PCB.
##0325 [RX] Main motor/exhaust fan trouble
Cause
• Internal unit fault. (main motor does not
turn)
(1)
(2)
• Internal unit fault. (exhaust fan does not
turn)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Check the connection between the main
motor and the DC controller PCB.
Check that the main motor is not overloaded.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Check the connection between the fan
and the DC controller PCB.
Replace the fan
Replace the DC controller PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-181
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0671 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed
beyond phase 2 after detection of CM signal on the calling side at the time a V.8 call is
received
Cause
• The caller’s line is cut at phase 1 or the
caller’s signal is not detected.
Countermeasure
• Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
#1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0672 [TX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 2 to beyond phase 3 during V.34 transmission
Cause
• The recipient’s line is cut at phase 1 or the
recipient’s signal is not detected.
Countermeasure
• Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
#1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 0.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0673 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 2 to beyond phase 3 during V.34 reception
Cause
• The transmitter’s line is cut at phase 2 or
the transmitter’s signal is not detected.
Countermeasure
• Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
#1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0674 [TX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 3 and phase 4 to beyond the control channel during V.34 transmission
Cause
• The transmitter’s line is cut at phase 3 or
phase 4, or the recipient’s signal is not
detected.
13-182
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
#1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 0.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0675 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 3 and phase 4 to beyond the control channel during V.34 transmission
Cause
• The transmitter’s line is cut at phase 3 or
phase 4, or the transmitter’s signal is not
detected
Countermeasure
• Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
#1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0750 [TX] A significant signal is not received and the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-NULL output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-NULL is
not properly transmitted.
• The line is poor and the signal can not be
received properly.
Countermeasure
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-NULL.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive PPS-NULL.
(3) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0752 [TX] DCN received after PPS-NULL transmission
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-NULL
can not be properly received.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-NULL.
• Resend.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-183
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0753 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-NULL output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-NULL because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data entry’s Tx settings function settings
(2) Lower the Tx speed setting in the user
mode.
##0754 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-NULL
output
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-NULL
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but the other party’s machine
can not receive properly.
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-NULL
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but a significant signal can not
be properly received.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive CTC.
• Have the other party raise the output level
so the signal can be received properly.
##0755 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-MPS is
not transmitted properly.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
13-184
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-MPS.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive PPS-MPS.
(3) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0757 [TX] DCN received after PPS-MPS output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-MPS
can not be properly received.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-MPS.
• Resend.
##0758 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-MPS because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data entry’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
##0759 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-MPS
output
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-MPS
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but the other party’s machine
can not receive properly.
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-MPS
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but a significant signal can not
be properly received.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive CTC.
• Have the other party raise the output level
so the signal can be received properly.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-185
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0760 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not receive PPS-EOM
properly.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
Countermeasure
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
(3) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0762 [TX] DCN received after PPS-EOM output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-EOM
can not be properly received.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
• Resend.
##0763 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-EOM because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
13-186
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data entry’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0764 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOM
output
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOM
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but the other party’s machine
can not receive properly.
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOM
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but a significant signal can not
be properly received.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive CTC.
• Have the other party raise the output level
so the signal can be received properly.
##0765 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOP output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not receive PPS-EOP
properly.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
Countermeasure
(1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-EOP.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive PPS-EOP.
(3) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0767 [TX] DCN received after PPS-EOP output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and PPS-EOP
can not be properly received.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-EOP.
• Resend.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-187
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0768 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOP output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-EOP because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data entry’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
##0769 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOP
output
Cause
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOP
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but the other party’s machine
can not receive properly.
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOP
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC
was output, but a significant signal can not
be properly received.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive CTC.
• Have the other party raise the output level
so the signal can be received properly.
##0770 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-NULL output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not receive EOR-NULL
properly.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
13-188
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-NULL.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0772 [TX] DCN received after EOR-NULL output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and EOR-NULL
can not be properly received.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be properly received.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-NULL.
• Resend.
##0773 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after EOR-NULL output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
EOR-NULL because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data entry’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
##0774 [TX] ERR received after EOR-NULL output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and frequently the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the image signal.
(1)
(2)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling using the dial button, manually press the start button after you have
heard the other party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-189
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0775 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-MPS output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-MPS.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-MPS.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0777 [TX] DCN received after EOR-MPS output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-MPS.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-MPS.
• Resend.
##0778 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-MPS because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
13-190
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data registration’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0779 [TX] ERR received after EOR-MPS output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and frequently the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the image signal.
(1)
(2)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
##0780 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-EOM output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-EOM.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-EOM.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0782 [TX] DCN received after EOR-EOM output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-EOM.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-EOM.
• Resend.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-191
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0783 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
PPS-EOM because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data registration’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
##0784 [TX] ERR received after EOR-EOM output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and frequently the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the image signal.
(1)
(2)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
##0785 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-EOP output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-EOP.
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
13-192
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-EOP.
• Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0787 [TX] DCN received after EOR-EOP output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not properly receive
EOR-EOP.
• The stop button was pressed during communications.
Countermeasure
• Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive EOR-EOP.
• Resend.
##0788 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after EOR-EOP output
Cause
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is
full, or RNR was received after output of
EOR-EOP because the machine was in
use, and after RR output a significant signal
could not be properly received.
Countermeasure
(1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
data registration’s Tx settings.
(2) After registering one-touch or coded dialing in the user mode, lower Tx speed setting using detailed settings.
##0789 [TX] ERR received after EOR-EOP output
Cause
• The line condition is poor and frequently the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the image signal.
(1)
(2)
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other
party’s first DIS.
Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-193
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0790 [RX] ERR output after EOR-Q reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and frequently the
other party’s machine can not properly
receive the image signal.
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due
to echo.
Countermeasure
(1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
(2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal.
• Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo countermeasures.
##0791 [TX/RX] Signal other than a significant signal received during ECM mode procedure
Cause
• Protocol signal abnormality
Countermeasure
(1) Record the communication signal on DAT
and analyze it.
##0793 [RX] Valid frame can not be detected and the time limit is exceeded during highspeed signal reception
Cause
• The line condition is poor and the other
party’s machine can not receive the signal
properly.
(1)
(2)
• The line condition is poor and the signal
can not be received properly.
(1)
(2)
• The communication codec is busy.
13-194
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
(1)
(2)
Countermeasure
Raise the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the other
party’s machine can properly receive the
signal.
Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU parameter 005, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the signal.
Have the other party’s machine’s status
speed lowered.
Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
Turn the power off then on.
Replace the FAX PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
##0795 [TX/RX] Problem occurred in the ?communications? decoding processing
Cause
• The communication codec is busy.
Countermeasure
(1) Turn the power off then on.
(2) Replace the FAX PCB.
##0799 [TX] System error
Cause
• EOR output attempted during speed dial
procedure.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Countermeasure
(1) Turn the power off then on.
(2) Replace the FAX PCB.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
13-195
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
APPENDIX
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL TIMING CHART.....................A-1
SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS...........A-3
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
D.
E.
LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS....................A-11
SOLVENTS AND OILS..........................A-12
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
• Conditions: Copy / A4 paper / main unit cassette pick-up / 3 sheets
Power ON
STBY
INTR2
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
ESS
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
INTR1
Start ON
Main motor (M601)
150°C control
Fixing heater
160°C control
Forward
Document scanner motor (M701)
Reverse
Scanner HP sensor (PS101)
Scanning lamp
Shading measurement
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL301)
Pick-up vertical path clutch (CL301)
Pick-up sensor (PS303)
Registration clutch (CL302)
Registration sensor (PS302)
Paper leading edge sensor
(PS301)
Paper width sensor (PS304)
Primary charging roller bias DC
Primary charging roller bias AC
Transfer charging roller bias
Negative bias
Paper interval bias
Negative bias
Separation static charge
eliminator bias
Re-charge eliminator bias
Laser scanner motor (M801)
Laser exposure
Developing bias DC
Paper interval bias
Developing bias AC
Delivery sensor (PS306)
Exhaust fan (FM301)
90 sec.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-1
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
A-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
600
1200DPI
ACC
BDI
CVROPN
CL301D
CL302D
DCPWM
DCSON
DEC
DVACON
DVDUP
ENBL
FSRDRV1
FSRDRV2
LMPON
LON
MMD
MRDY
PRACON
PS101S
PS102S
PS301S
PS302S
PS303S
PS304S
PS305S
PS306S
PS501S
PSIZ0
PSIZ1
PSIZ2
PSIZ3
STMP
TNRCHKD
TNRCHKT
TRNFOT
TRPWM
TSTON
VDO
LASER INTENSITY SWITCH signal
BIAS SWITCH signal
LASER SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATE command
BEAM DETECTION INPUT signal
FRONT COVER OPEN signal
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
PRIMARY BIAS DC CONTROL signal
STATIC ELIMINATOR BIAS DRIVE signal
LASER SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATE command
DEVELOPING BIAS AC ON command
DEVELOPING BIAS DC ON command
IMAGE FORMATION ACKNOWLEDGE signal
FIXING HEATER 1 DRIVE command
FIXING HEATER 2 DRIVE command
SCANNING LAMP DRIVE command
LASER ON command
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command
MAIN MOTOR READY signal
PRIMARY BIAS AC CONTROL signal
SCANNER HOME POSITION signal
COPYBOARD COVER OPEN signal
PAPER LEADING EDGE DETECTION signal
REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
PICK-UP PAPER DETECTION signal
PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
DELIVERY DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER PAPER signal
CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 0
CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 1
CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 2
CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 3
STAMP SOLENOID DRIVE command
CARTRIDGE CHECK DEVELOPING BIAS AC signal
CARTRIDGE ANTENNA OUTPUT signal
TRANSFER NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE command
TRANSFER POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE command
VIDEO signal
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
A-3
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
I. Image processor PCB
Image processor PCB (1/3)
TP204
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
KO7
KO5
K10
K14
K11
K12
K13
K15
KO2
KO3
KO4
KO6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 171819 20 212223242526
GND
ADIN
CCD-OUT-EVEN
CCD-OUT- ODD
Inverter
PCB
+24U
+24U
LMPON
R-GND
R-GND
J32
4
3
2
1
+12
D-GND
+5U
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
RCLK
D-GND
SHG*
ECLK*
CL*
D-GND
SIN
SCLK
LD
D-GND
ABC-OFF*
ABC-HOLD*
N.C
N.C
D-GND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D-GND
D4
D5
D6
D7
D-GND
J33
J35
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
J39
J22
J21
J44
J43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
J20
J41
J49
TP203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
J42
J51
J23
Scanner moter
M701
J38
J24
SEN5V
D-GND
PS102S
J212
J64
1 2 3
1 2 3
J216
J66
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
J217
J50
J203
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
+24U
+24U
LMPON
R-GND
R-GND
Image processor PCB
D-GND
BK-SZS0
OFF5V
D-GND
BK-SZS1
OFF5V
D-GND
BK-SZS2
OFF5V
D-GND
BK-SZS3
OFF5V
D-GND
R-CLK
D-GND
SHG*
E-CLK*
CL*
D-GND
S-IN
S-CLK
LD
D-GND
ABC-OFF*
ABC-HOLD*
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
AD-IN0
AD-IN1
AD-IN2
AD-IN3
D-GND
AD-IN4
AD-IN5
AD-IN6
AD-IN7
D-GND
OFF5V
D-GND
PS101S
1 2 3
1312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J48
J207 1 2 3 4 5
26 25 24 2322 212019 18 1716 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J208
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
STMP D-GND
+24U PNLCK
D-GND
D-GND
RESET*
D-GND
TXD to PNL
PROTECT
RXD from PNL
ESSKEY*
ESSLED
FLM
M
LP
SCP
DSP-OFF
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
PRST*
+12V
26 2524 2322 212019 18 1716 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
J62
J214
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
COM
+24V
J61
Speaker
TP61
M
B*
A*
COM-B
COM-A
B
A
J60
Thermoswitch
J213
2 1
J63
J211
SPKOH
SPKOL
Analog processor PCB
14 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
D-GND
PNLCK
D-GND
D-GND
RESET*
D-GND
TXD
PRTCT
RXD
4 3 2 1
Control panel PCB
ESSKEY*
ESSLED
FLM
M
LP
SCP
DOFF
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
PRST*
+12V
LA20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 171819 20 2122232425 26
J46
LCD
TP202
J34
J45
LCDFG
VD
-24V
D-GND
+5U
DB3
DB2
DB1
DB0
D.OFF
SCP
LP
M
FLM
TP201
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
Scanning lamp
J53
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
KO0/KO3
K17
KO5/KO6
K16
RMDSW
ESSKEY*
ESSLED
COVERL
COVERM
COVERH
SE1
OP0
VOL0
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3
LCDFG
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
KO7
KO5
K10
K14
K11
K12
K13
K15
KO2
KO3
KO4
KO6
J52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
KO0/KO3
K17
KO5/KO6
K16
RMDSW
ESSKEY*
ESSLED
COVERL
COVERM
COVERH
SE1
OP0
VOL0
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3
LCDFG
Control panel sub-PCB
J54
J219
2 1 J68
Reserved
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J65
PS101
Scanner home
position sensor
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
3 2 1
J67
PS102
Copyboard cover
open/close sensor
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
SL
SL301
Stamp solenoid
A-5
for DC power supply PCB
A-6
J209
for DC controller PCB
N.C
MOT-I2
MOT-I0
MOT-I1
PS851S
PS802S
PS852S
PS805S
PS801S
DF-LS1
+5U
PS803S
+24U
PS806S
+24U
I-DOWN
+24U
M-A-ENB
R-GND
M-RTRN
R-GND
RST-MOT*
R-GND
M-CCW
OFF5V
M-A-CK
D-GND
M-MOD3
D-GND
M-MOD2
SEN5V
M-MOD1
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
-12V
-12V
A-GND
A-GND
+12V
+12V
MDMMNT
F-IOWR*
N.C
F-IORD*
N.C
IOCS3*
N.C
IOCS46*
D-GND
IOCS2*
D-GND
ABUS5
N.C
ABUS4
N.C
ABUS3
ESS-OUT*
ABUS2
ESS-HOOK*
ABUS1
ESS-CI*
DBUS7
ESS-FC*
DBUS6
INTMDM
DBUS5
RST-NOP*
DBUS4
OGMSTR*
DBUS3
RSTMDM*
DBUS2
+5U
DBUS1
+5U
DBUS0
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
for ADF relay PCB
J202
J201
1
31
2
32
3
33
4
34
5
35
6
36
7
37
8
38
9
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A1
B16
A2
B15
A3
B14
A4
B13
A5
B12
A6
B11
A7
B10
A8
B9
A9
B8
A10
B7
A11
B6
A12
B5
A13
B4
A14
B3
A15
B2
A16
B1
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
A16
B16
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A24
B24
A25
B25
for G3FAX MODEM
Reserved
J205
J218
Image processor PCB
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 J215
Reserved
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
ABUS5
ABUS0
ABUS3
ABUS4
ABUS1
ABUS2
DBUS0
DBUS15
DBUS8
DBUS7
DBUS1
DBUS14
DBUS9
DBUS6
DBUS2
DBUS13
DBUS10
DBUS5
DBUS3
DBUS12
DBUS11
DBUS4
LPS-TOP*
LPS-BD*
PCL-CLK
PCL-STR*
INT-PIF1*
PCL-DAT
V-UBE*
INT-PIF2*
DMA-TC*
LPS-PRT*
DAK5*
DAK2*
DRQ5
DRQ2
RST-OPT*
F-IOWR*
F-IORD*
G4-MNT
IOCS7*
ESS-ACT*
N.C
G4-SPKON*
+12V
LPS-VDO*
-12V
D-GND
G4-PCI
A-GND
A-GND
D-GND
A-GND
+5U
+5U
D-GND
+5U
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
REG-TOP*
N.C
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PPRDY*
CCRT*
SBSY*
PCLK*
STS*
RDY*
TOP*
CBSY*
CCLK*
CMD*
PRNT*
PRFD*
CPRDY*
ESS
N.C
D-GND
BD*
VDO*
VDO
+24U
R-GND
R-GND
A-GND
+5U
+5U
+5U
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
XPON
XPCI
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
+5U
-12V
+12V
A-GND
R-GND
+24U
+24U
A1
B12
A2
B11
A3
B10
A4
B9
A5
B8
A6
B7
A7
B6
A8
B5
A9
B4
A10
B3
A11
B2
A12
B1
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
Image processor PCB (2/3)
Vss
D1
D3
D5
D7
RDY/BSY*
A1
A3
A5
A7
D8
D10
D12
D14
A10
A11
OE*
D15
N.C
Vss
A14
A16
A18
PRTCT*
N.C
N.C
N.C
CSH*(CS01*)
A22(N.C)
A24(N.C)
Vcc
CS2H*(CS11*)
Vpp
PD3
BYTE*
Vss
Vss
DQ1
DQ3
DQ5
DQ7
PD1
A1
A3
A5
A10
DQ9
DQ11
DQ13
DQ15
A11
AB
RE3*
DQ16
DQ18
Vss
CE2*
CE1*
RE1*
W*
DQ20
DQ22
DQ24
DQ26,N.C
DQ28
DQ30
Vdd
DQ33
DQ35,N.C
PD3
PD5
PD7
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
DQ0
DQ2
DQ4
DQ6
Vdd
A0
A2
A4
A6
DQ8,N.C
DQ10
DQ12
DQ14
A7
Vdd
A9
RE2*
DQ17,N.C
DQ19
CE0*
CE3*
RE0
A12
A13
DQ21
DQ23
DQ25
DQ27
DQ29
DQ31
DQ32
DQ34
PD2
PD4
PD5
Vss
for Image processor PCB
D0
D2
D4
D6
Vcc
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
D9
D11
D13
A9
Vcc
A12
CSL*(CS00*)
WR*
N.C
A13
A15
A17
A19
A20(N.C)
N.C
N.C
N.C
A21(N.C)
A23(N.C)
A25(N.C)
N.C
CS2L*(CS10*)
WP*
PD4
16/32*
RESET*
J210 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
D0
D2
D4
D6
+5VB
XA0
XA2
XA4
XA6
N.C
D9
D11
D13
XA7
+5VB
XA9
RAS2*
N.C
D1
CASL*
CASH*
RAS1*
N.C
N.C
D3
D5
D7
D8
D10
D12
D13
D15
N.C
N.C
N.C
D-GND
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
J204 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
DBUS0
DBUS2
DBUS4
DBUS6
+5U
ABUS1
ABUS3
ABUS5
ABUS7
ABUS9
DBUS9
DBUS11
DBUS13
ABUS10
+5U
ABUS13
CS-DAT*
pull-up +5U
N.C
ABUS14
ABUS16
ABUS18
ABUS20
ABUS21
N.C
N.C
N.C
ABUS22
D-GND
D-GND
N.C
CS-PRG*
N.C
N.C
pull-up +5U
pull-up +5U
for Program ROM DIMM
Program ROM DIMM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Image processor PCB
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
For Expanded memory
for Image processor PCB
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
D-GND
D1
D3
D5
D7
N.C
XA1
XA3
XA5
XA10
D8
D10
D12
D14
N.C
XAB
N.C
D15
D0
D-GND
CASL*
CASH*
N.C
WE*
D2
D4
D6
N.C
D9
D11
+5VB
D14
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
D-GND
DBUS1
DBUS3
DBUS5
DBUS7
N.C
ABUS2
ABUS4
ABUS6
ABUS8
DBUS8
DBUS10
DBUS12
DBUS14
ABUS11
ABUS12
MRD*
DBUS15
N.C
D-GND
ABUS15
ABUS17
ABUS19
D-GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
CS-DAT*
ABUS23
D-GND
+5U
CS-PRG*
N.C
N.C
N.C
D-GND
Image processor PCB (3/3)
Expanded memory
A-7
II. DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB (1/2)
J190
for Image processor PCB
for Analog processor PCB
J184
J182
6 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J93
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
+24V1
MGND
MGND
AGMD
+5VS1
+5VS1
+5VS1
DGND
DGND
DGMD
XPON
XPCI
DGND
DGND
+5VS1
+5VS1
-12V
+12V
AGND
MGND
+24V1
+24V1
DGND
DGND
DGND
+5VS1
DGND
+12V
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
J107
J183
J106
1 2
J105
J110
AC-H
AC-N
J181
1 2 3 4 5 6
J101
for G3FAX NCU board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6
J91
ARG
N.C
GND
PCI
J92
J108 1 2 3 4
J109 1 2 3 4
1
3
2
J104
5
4
7
9
6
8
11
10
for Image processor PCB
13
12
14
J352
J151
Reserved
Reserved
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
A1
B12
A2
B11
A3
B10
A4
B9
A5
B8
A6
B7
A7
B6
A8
B5
A9
B4
A10
B3
A11
B2
A12
B1
J111 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
J156
J157
RLYD
DGND
+24V2
+24V2
MGND
MGND
+5VS1
+5VS1
DGND
DGND
FSRDRV1
DGND
FSEDRV2
ZEROX*
+5VS1
+5VS1
GND
GND
+24V2
+24V2
3
+24V1
+24V1
MGND
MGND
FSRN
2
1 2 3 4 5
+5VS2
+5VS2
DGND
DGND
FSRH2
J103 1
J102
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
FSRH1
DC power supply PCB
6 5 4 3 2 1
J377
TB 102
for Cassette feeder
J351
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
J163
J364
1 2 3 4
DOOR SW
J322
J152
J305 1
J321
J312
+24Vdr
N.C
N.C
+24Vdr
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
J172
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 4 3 2 1
J171
1 2 3 4
J162
5 4 3 2 1
1
2
3
1
2
3
J1307
J1305
TB1305 J1304
J1301
1 2
1 2
2 1
cr
Delivery sensor (PS306)
J1306
J1307
TSW1
9
8
11
10
13
12
1
14
J301
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
21
20
23
22
24
DSC
PR
DC controller PCB
TR
DEV TNRCHKT
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
7
6
GND
Hivoltage output unit
1 2 3 4 5
J1302
FSRTH
D-GND
LEDON
D-GND
PS306S
HALFFAN*
FANLOCK
R-GND
1 2 3 4
RT103
TB1306
5
4
+24V
ACC
DEC
R-GND
1200*
MRDY*
+24V
+24V
MON*
R-GND
R-GND
+5U
BDI
D-GND
+5U
600*
ENBL*
LON*
D-GND
VDO
VDO*
D-GND
J161
J308
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
RLYD
D-GND
+24V
+24V
R-GND
R-GND
+5U
+5U
D-GND
D-GND
FSRDRV1
D-GND
FSRDRV2
ZERO
J164
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 192021 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J324
J323
REGTOP*
+5U
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PPRDY*
CCRT*
SBSY*
PCLK*
STS*
RDY*
TOP*
CBSY*
CCLK*
CMD*
PRNT*
PRFD*
CPRDY*
ESS
RESET
D-GND
BDO*
VDO*
VDO*
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
J304 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22
J353
J356
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3
J173
J174
3 2 1
J1303
Heater H2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M
J601
TH1
Thermistor
Fixing heater unit
Fixing unit
A-8
3 2 1
J357
4 3 2 1
J1001
Main motor
M701
Laser scanner motor
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J358
3 2 1
M601
FM301
Exhaust fan
4 3 2 1
J355
J701
M
J354
Heater H1
BD PCB
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J901
Laser unit
Laser scanner unit
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
J94
DC controller PCB (2/2)
PS302
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
SL302
SL
CL301
CL302
CL
CL
PS501
SW501
VR501
Multifeeder paper Test print
Adjust
supply sensor output switch the leading edge
Sensor PCB
1 2
J517
3
J508
1 2
1 2
J506
J504
J401
J505
J502
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
2 1
PS303
Pick-up vertical
path clutch Registration
Multifeeder
pick-up solenoid
clutch
+5U
MPSNS*
SNSON*
D-GND
D-GND
RGADJ
TPRNT*
D-GND
1 2 3
PS301
J511
1 2 3
PS304
J512
SL301
SL
Pick-up Registration
sensor paper sensor
J514
PS305
J515
Pick-up solenoid
J516
Cassette paper Paper width Paper length
supply sensor
sensor edge sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J306
2 1
J507
1 2 3 4 5 6
J513
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J510
1 2 3 4 5 6
J303
2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J307
SL302D
+24V
CL301D
+24V
+24V
CL302D
+24V
CL301D
CSTSNS*
PS305S
LEDON
PS304S
SNSON*
LEDON
PS301 S
SNSON*
LEDON
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J519
PS303S
SNSON*
LEDON
PS302S
SNSON*
LEDON
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J509
J503
J309
+5U
MPSNS*
PS501S
D-GND
D-GND
RGADJ
TSTON
D-GND
J518
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J371 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
PSIZ0
PSIZ1
GND
PSIZ2
PSIZ3
STERM*
TXDO*
RXDO*
STB*
SCLK*
GND
J311
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDO*
TXDO*
STERM*
+5U
GND
DC controller PCB
J310
5 4 3 2 1
J375
J325
5 4 3 2 1
J302
J368
2 1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J372
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 J365
J376 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 for DC power supply
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
J364
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
J379
2 1
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
J381
TP105
for Cassette feeder
J364
SW301
J365
J367
J366
J363
J362
J361
J401 1 2 3 4 5
SW401 SW402 SW403 SW404
Cassette size sensor switch
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-9
III. Cassette Feeder
Feeder controller PCB
J681
J662
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pick-up solenoid
Paper supply sensor
SL
1 2 3
M651
K
SL651
1 2 3 4
PS652
Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
K
J677
SW651
J680
1 2 3
J664
PS651
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
J671
J663
3 2 1
J679
4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J561
1 2 3 4
J670
J678
1 2
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
J666
6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J662
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
PS652S
GND
CLED
PS651S
GND
FLED
J676
5 4 3 2 1
6 4 3 2 1
J655
J672
J655
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
GND
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
B*
B
A*
A
J679
Cassette feeder-one level type
J667
TP652
Feeder motor Pick-up solenoid
Paper supply sensor
Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
J668
M
M651
K
SL
J681
J674
1 2 3 4 5
6 5 4 3 2 1
J665
5 4 3 2 1
J653
J656
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
J681
6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
Feeder controller PCB
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
STERML*
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J652
SL651D
+24VF
1 2 3 4
J651
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
STERMU*
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SL651
1 2 3 4
PS652
K
J677
SW651
J680
1 2 3
J664
PS651
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
J671
J663
3 2 1
J679
4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J561
1 2 3 4
J670
J678
1 2
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
J666
6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J662
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
PS652S
GND
CLED
PS651S
GND
FLED
5 4 3 2 1
6 4 3 2 1
J655
J672
J655
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
GND
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
B*
B
A*
A
J679
J676
Cassette feeder-two level type
J667
TP652
Feeder motor Pick-up solenoid
Paper supply sensor
Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
J668
M
M651
K
SL
J681
J674
1 2 3 4 5
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J665
5 4 3 2 1
J653
J656
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
J681
6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
Feeder controller PCB
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
STERML*
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J652
SL651D
+24VF
1 2 3 4
J651
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
STERMU*
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SL651
1 2 3 4
PS652
K
J677
SW651
J680
1 2 3
J664
PS651
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
J671
J663
3 2 1
J679
4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J561
1 2 3 4
J670
J678
1 2
3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
J674
J653
J679
1 2 3 4 5
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J676
5 4 3 2 1
6 4 3 2 1
J655
J672
J655
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
GND
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
J656
1 2
PS652S
GND
CLED
PS651S
GND
FLED
B*
B
A*
A
J652
Feeder controller PCB
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
STERML*
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
SL651D
+24VF
J651
+5U
+5U
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
SCLK*
STB*
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
STERMU*
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Cassette feeder-three level type
A-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Feeder motor
for main body DC controller PCB
APPENDIX
D LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS
The following are special tools used to service to copier: use them in addition the
standard set of tools.
No.
Tool Name
Tool No.
Shape
Rank
Remarks
1
Digital
Multimeter
FY9-2002-000
A
2
Door switch
acutuator
TKN-0093
A
3
Mirror positioning FY9-3009-040
tool (front, rear)
B
For adjusting the
distance
between No.1
and No.2 mirror
mounts.
4
Pulley clip
C
Scanner wire
adjustment
FY9-3010-000
Use it to check
the power.
*Consult the following for a stocking idea.
A: Each service person is expected to carry one.
B: Each group of five service persons is expected to carry one.
C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
A-11
APPENDIX
E. SOLVENTS AND OILS
No.
Name
1 Alcohol
Use
Cleaning: e.g.,
glass, plastics
(Note), and rubber parts and
external covers.
2
Solvent
Cleaning; e.g.,
metal parts;
removing oil or
toner.
3
4
Lubricant
Lubricant
ADF drive gear.
A-12
Composition
Carbon hydrogen
of fluorine family
Alcohol
Surface activating
agent
Water
Carbon hydrogen
of fluorine family
Alcohol
Carbon hydrogen
of chlorine family
Silicone oil
Mineral oil (paraffin family)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Remarks
• C1, IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
MEK
CK-8005
CK-0451
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (FEB. 1999) [28319]
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com
This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
0299AB1.51-1
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com